Docstoc

Damascus University Faculty of Dentistry Self Evaluation Report

Document Sample
Damascus University Faculty of Dentistry Self Evaluation Report Powered By Docstoc
					             Damascus University
                Faculty of Dentistry




             Self Evaluation Report

           Bachelor of Dental Surgery



                   (Damascus)

                   (May) 2011




Accreditation Agency of Bachelor’s Study Programs


      Writin by: Dr. Mayssoon Dashash
 Tempus coordinator for the Faculty of Dentistry
        Tempus Team in the Faculty of Dentisty


Dr. Mayssoon Dashash

Prof. Husain Abu- Hamed

Prof. Mohamed Yousef

Dr. Nabeel Al- Houri

Dr. Rani Hadad
                                 Table of Content

1. Study Program

1.1         General information on study program

1.1.1       Formal details
1.1.1.1     Name of the study program
1.1.1.2     Degree to be awarded
1.1.1.3     Standard period of study
1.1.1.4     Date of commencement for the study program
1.1.1.5     Target numbers/teacher-student ratio
1.1.1.6     Fees/remuneration

1.1.2       Reasons for setting up the program
1.1.2.1     Demand among prospective students
1.1.2.2     Positioning of graduates in the job market
1.1.2.3     Demand among the professional field

1.1.3       Cooperation arrangements concerning the study program at hand


1.2         Educational Aims

1.2.1       Overall Aims of the study program
1.2.2       Illustration of the qualifications to be gained through the study
1.2.3       Aims of the individual lectures and seminars
1.2.4       Relation to practical work, research, practicals, interdisciplinary
            cooperation; whether the degree qualifies graduates to enter the
            chosen profession


1.3         Entry and admission requirements

1.3.1       Admission requirements
1.3.1.1     General/subject specific requirements for university level
            entry/relevant professional training
1.3.1.2     Placements/work experience
1.3.1.3     Foreign languages
1.3.1.4     Assessment of suitability
1.3.2       Aditional selection criteria


1.4         Curriculum

1.4.1       Type of course taught (full-time, part-time, advanced/continuing
            education)
1.4.2   Structure (subjects on offer, compulsory/core subjects, optional
        compulsory field of study, subsidiaries, specialization,
        modularization)
1.4.3   Number of credit hours and credit points, compulsory attendance, self-
        study
1.4.4   Orientation (national/international – lectures in foreign languages,
        semesters abroad, link programs for foreign students)
1.4.5   Credit points for studying and examination performance
1.4.6   Examinations (oral, written, other)
1.4.7   Study and examination regulations


1.5     Personnel involved in the study program

1.5.1   Constitution form (professors, contract teachers, academic
        collaborators, full-time/part-time academic, technical and
        administrative employees,
1.5.2   Counseling time (study counseling, fixed consulting hours, tutorials,
        mentor programs)
1.5.3   Retraining courses for teaching staff

1.6     Quality assurance measures

1.6.1   Evaluation during the study program (e.g. survey of students)
1.6.2   Evaluation of the success of the study program (e.g. survey of
        graduates)
1.6.3   Alignment and further development of the teaching and
        examination plan (e.g. by study commissions)

2.      Institution

2.1     General information on the institution involved
2.1.1   Description of the institution (departments involved,
        laboratories, scientific background)

2.1.2   Committees related to the teaching in the study programs to be
        accredited (academic study commission)
2.1.3   Research facilities, focus of research activities, R&D activities in relation
        to the study programs to be accredited)
2.1.4   Study programs, courses and degrees (including opportunities
        for further study)
2.1.5   Special strength in teaching and research
2.1.6   Academic personnel for the course (CV)
2.1.7   Contract teachers, other special professorships, non-academic
        personnel
2.2.      Resources

2.2.1     Resources for teaching (current budget)
2.2.1.1   Personnel resources (teaching appointments, guest speakers,
          student assistants, etc.)
2.2.1.2   Physical resources (excursions, equipment maintenance,
          teaching materials, etc.)
2.2.1.3   Investment funds (purchase of equipment, computer equipment,
          etc.
2.2.2     Premises (lecture halls, seminar rooms, student
          workplaces, etc)
2.2.3     Investment resources for major equipment purchased over the
          last three years or due to be purchased

2.3       Support for teaching and studying

2.3.1     Data processing facilities
2.3.1.1   Data processing equipment, (reinvestment, programs,
          program support, maintenance)
2.3.1.2   Supervision of students (tutorials)/qualifications of the personnel
          (training)
2.3.1.3   Accessibility, number of computers/pools, opening times,
          etc.
2.3.1.4   Description of tasks carried out by students on PCs
          (workstations)
2.3.1.5   Restrictions/hindrances

2.3.2     Library/literature/media services
2.3.2.1   Stock of publications (monograph titles, periodicals, etc.)
2.3.2.2   Other media (maps, microfiche, audio)
2.3.2.3   Purchasing/responsibility, coordination, etc.
2.3.2.4   Accessibility for students/electronic access
2.3.2.5   Qualifications of the personnel
2.3.2.6   Workplaces for students
2.3.2.7   Restrictions/hindrances

2.3.3     Provision of laboratory facilities/equipment
2.3.3.1   Equipment and technical status
2.3.3.2   Supervision of students/qualifications of the personnel
2.3.3.3   Accessibility, workplaces, opening times
2.3.3.4   Restrictions/hindrances



2.4       Students and graduates of the institutions involved
          (presentation and interpretation of data)
2.4.1       First year students listed by study programs
2.4.2       Students listed by number of semesters and study programs
2.4.3       Graduates (successful preliminary, intermediate and final
            examinations)
2.4.4       Student-teacher ratio


Appendix:
A           Teaching content of study courses
B           CV of teaching staff
C           Literature, reports and study books
1 Study program
1.1 General information on the study program


1.1.1   Formal details

1.1.1.1 Name of the study program         Dentistry Program

1.1.1.2 Degree to be awarded              Doctor of Dental Surgery

1.1.1.3 Standard period of study
                                          5 years

1.1.1.4 Date of commencement for          1919
       the study program

1.1.1.5 Target numbers/teacher-           1/20
        student ratio

1.1.1.6 Fees / remuneration               (700-1200SP) Syrian Pound for Syrians,



1.1.2   Reasons for setting up the program

1.1.2.1 Demand among prospective          Data not available.
       students
1.1.2.2 Positioning of graduates in the   No sufficient data. However, according to quality
       job market                         assurance center in Damascus University, 65 % of
                                          graduate mentioned that they wish to travel to Gulf
                                          countries during the first 5 years of their
                                          gradualtion.
1.1.2.3 Demand among the                  7.9 for 10,000 population
        professional field
1.1.3 Cooperation arrangements concerning the study program at hand
1.1.3.1 Internal cooperation             Academic staff from Faculty of Medicine,
(interdisciplinary, transdisciplinary)      Faculty of linguistics and Faculty of
                                                  science, Faculty of mechanics and
                                                  electronics, Damascus University.
                                               Other dental staff from other public
                                                  universities in Syria.
                                               Professional bodies such as Ministry of
                                                  Health and Ministry of education.
                                               National Research instititutions.
1.1.3.2 External cooperation with         Many agreements have been signed.However, they
        other institutions                are not active.
1.2 Educational aims

1.2.1 Overall aims of the study program       1.Provide competent knowledge, practical and
                                              clinical skills to manage comprehensive recent
                                              dental care in community and hospital.

                                              2.Promote oral health in community.

                                              3.Develop professional and ethical values,
                                              communication, teamwork and research skills.

                                              4.Integrate critical thinking, evidence based and
                                              lifelong learning skills into everyday practice.

                                              5.Promote the role of the dentist within the health
                                              service.
1.2.2 Illustration of the qualifications to   Dentist should realize the need to perform
      be gained through the study             emergency, preventive and dental procedures
      (capabilities, skills)
                                              according to patient's interest. Dentist should
                                              demonstrate capacity to foster ethical and
                                              professional practice. This is achieved through:
                                               Dentist should realize that importance of
                                               building trust with patients and recognizes the
                                               importance of confidentiality and be familiar with
                                               treatment options, and current evidence of support,
                                               and realize that the informed consent and the
                                               importance of clarifying information to the patient
                                               regarding treatment options, including the risks
                                               involved and the importance of taking into account
                                               the patients with special needs.
                                               Has knowledge about General diseases that
                                               may affect dental clinic practice and be able to
                                               carry out the necessary emergency procedures.
                                               Should recognize the need to provide primary
                                               health care in a safe environment for patients and
                                               medical staff in accordance with health and safety
                                               regulations and realize the principles of infection
                                               control, and protection against radiation and
                                               substances hazardous to health and approaches to
                                               maintain safety equipment.
                                               Dentist should be able to recognize the
                                               importance of lifelong learning and have the
                                                ability to develop analytical approach and
                                                stimulate critical thinking, and has knowledge
                                                about methods for undertaking scientific and skills
                                                in the field of medical informatics and the
                                                collection, evaluation and providing evidence.
                                                Should be able to communicate in both Arabic
                                                and forign language, has the ability to participate
                                                in conferences and search in scientific journals and
                                                international resources.
                                                Dentist should be able to work in a team work
                                                to strengthen primary health care and be able to
                                                communicate and work with the medical team and
                                                group of oral health care in hospitals and health
                                                centres and mastered the management systems and
                                                be able to manage people.
1.2.3   Aims of the individual modules         There is no module system applied. Please see attached
        (summarized in the module              aim for every subjects
        handbook)
1.2.4   Relation to practical work,            C urriculum is traditional, Teacher and hospital based
        research, practicals,                  with no integration between basic science and clinical
        interdisciplinary cooperation;         Dentistry. No interprofessional collaboration between
        whether the degree qualifies           departments is available. Integrated and comprehensive
        graduates to enter the chosen          treatment is not applied. Research undertaken does not
        profession                             always meet population needs.(See studies related to
                                               "Attitude of dental graduates towards current
                                               curriculum dileverd") to see whether the degree
                                               qualifies graduates to enter the profession.

1.3 Entry and admission requirements (Bachelor)

1.3.1 Admission requirements                      Baccalaureate: 97-98% of total marks. Studies
                                                  include      Physics       (40        marks),
                                                  Mathematics(60marks),      Biology(30marks),
                                                  Chemistry(20 marks), national culture(20
                                                  marks), Arabic(40 marks) and English/French
                                                  language.
1.3.1.1 General/subject-specific                  No specific requirement
        requirements for university level
        entry/relevant professional training
1.3.1.2 Placements, work experience               No specific requirement

1.3.1.3 Foreign languages                         No specific requirement

1.3.1.4 Assessments of suitability                Medical assessment
1.3.2 Admission requirements (selection           Only according to the marks in baccalaureate. No
      criteria)                                   special admission criteria related to dentistry.
 1.4 Curriculum

 1.4.1 Type of course taught (full-time, part-   Full time course for 5 years. Involve traditional
        time, advanced training/continuing       teaching (theortical lectures) and practical work( lab
        education, based on                      and clinical work)
        multimedia/telematics)
 1.4.2 Structure (subjects on offer,             66 Compulsory subjects.
       compulsory/core subjects, optional        No optional subjects.
       compulsory field of study,
       subsidiaries, specialization,
        modularization)
1.4.3 Number of credit hours and credit          Credit system is not applied.
      points, compulsory attendance, self-       Practical hours are compulsory.
      study                                      No marks for independent or self study. Individual
                                                 effort but Not integral part of curriculum
 1.4.4 Orientation – national / international    N/A
       (lectures in foreign languages,
       Semesters abroad, link programs for
       foreign students)
 1.4.5 Credit points for studying and            N/A
       examination performance
 1.4.6 Examinations (oral, written, other)       Oral, practical(clinical, laboratory), written, interview.
 1.4.7 Study and examination regulations         Requirements for passing exams
                                                 In general, the minimum passing mark for all
                                                         subjects is 60/100.
                                                 Some subjects have practical and theoretical
                                                 components. Practical mark is equally obtained
                                                 from     practical exam and from the work
                                                 performed during the whole semester. Students
                                                 should pass the minimum passing mark in
                                                 practical to be eligible to set the theoretical
                                                 exam.
                                                 Requirements for passing the following year
                                                 Students who fail in the theoretical part of any
                                                 subject in the first or second semester is able to
                                                 set the exam again in summer exam. At the end
                                                 of second semester, student who fails in 4
                                                 subjects at most, is still considered successful
                                                 and is eligible to move to the following year.
                                                 Requirements for passing levels and grades
                                                       60-65% acceptable.
                                                       65-75% good.
                                                       75-85% very good.
                                                       85-95% excellent.
                                                       95-100% distinction.
                                                 Results of students evaluations
                                                  There are 2 studies evaluating the competence
                                                 of and satisfaction of dental undergraduates or
                                                 graduates. See appendix.
                 1.4.9 Overview of Study Plan (10 semesters)

                                                             First Year

                              1st Semester                                                    2nd Semester
                                 Subjects                                                       Subjects
             Number of                                      Marks                                                      Marks
No
             hours                         Title                          No    Credits            Title
                                                         60Theory+                                               60Theory+
                                                         40Practical             (Theory                         40Practical
             (Theory 2h,                                                            2h,       Medical
     1       Practical 2h).
                              Medical Physics                             9      Practical    chemistry
                                                                                   2h)

             (Theory 2h,                                 60Theory+                            Biological         100 theortical
             Practical 2h).                              40Practical            (Theory
     2                        Medical chemistry                           10    2h).
                                                                                              Statistics and
                                                                                              Epidemiology
             (Theory 2h,                                 60Theory+               (Theory                         60Theory+
             Practical 2h).                              40Practical                2h,                          40Practical
     3                          Cytology                                  11     Practical
                                                                                              Microbiology
                                                                                   2h).
             (Theory 3h,                                 60Theory+               (Theory                         60Theory+
             Practical 2h).   Anatomy of head and        40Practical                2h,                          40Practical
     4                        neck.                                       12     Practical
                                                                                              Immunology
                                                                                   1h).
             (Theory 2h,                                  50Theory+             (Theory                          100 theortical
                                                                                              foreign
             Practical 4h).                               50Practical           4h).
     5                        Dental anatomy                              13                  language(Engli
                                                                                              sh/French)
             (Theory 2h).     National culture                100               (Theory       Behavioral         100 theortical
     6                                                     theortical     14    2h).          Sciences and
                                                                                              Psychology
             (Theory 2h).     Arabic Language            100
                                                         theortical             (Theory
     7                                                                                                           60Theory+
                                                                                2h,           General
                                                                          15    Practical     Histology          40Practical
             (Theory 4h).     Foreign                    100                    4h).
     8                        language(English/French)   theortical
                                                          800marks              16                                  700 marks
             19 theortical+                                                     theortical+
Total        12 practical     8 subjects                                Total   9               7 subjects
             =31hours                                                           practical=
                                                                                25
                                                                                                           Total of marks =1500
         Total of subjects=15          Total of hours( 35 theortical + 21 practical) = 56 hours
                                                                                                                  marks
                                                       Second Year

                          3rd Semester                                                     4th Semester
                             Subjects                                                        Subjects
         Number of                                      Marks                                                     Marks
No
         hours                      Title                           No     Credits              Title
                                                     60Theory+                                               50Theory+
                                                     40Practical                                             50Practical
         (Theory 2h,                                                       (Theory 2h,
 16      Practical 2h).
                          Human Physiology                         22      Practical 4h)
                                                                                           Oral Histology


                                                     50Theory+                                               50Theory+
         (Theory 2h,                                 50Practical           (Theory 2h,                       50Practical
         Practical 4h).                                                                    Operative
 17                       Dental Materials                         23      Practical
                                                                                           Dentistry(1).
                                                                           4h).

         (Theory 2h).                                100Theory                                               50Theory+
                                                                           (Theory 2h,     Removable         50Practical
 18                       Genetics and Embryology                  24       Practical      Prosthodontics(
                                                                              4h).         1).

         (Theory 2h,      Fixed Prosthodontics(1).   50Theory+                                               100 theortical
         Practical 4h).                              50Practical
 19                                                                25      (Theory 2h)     Oral Physiology


         (Theory 2h).                                    100                                                 100 theortical
                                                      theortical           (Theory 3h).     Internal
                          Diseases of Eye, Ear,
 20                       Nose and throat                          26                       Medicine+
                                                                                            dermatology

         (Theory 4h).     Foreign                        100                               minor             50Theory+
                          language(English/French)    theortical           (Theory 2h,                       50Practical
 21                                                                27      Practical       surgery and
                                                                           2h).            Surgical
                                                                                           diseases
                                                                           (Theory 4h).    Foreign             100 theortical
                                                                                           language(Englis
                                                                   28                      h/French)

                                                     500marks              17theortical                         700 marks
         14 theortical+
                                                                           + 14
Total    10 practical     5 subjects                               Total   practical
                                                                                             7 subjects
         =24hours
                                                                           =31
                                                                                                      Total of marks =1200
     Total of subjects=12          Total of hours( 31 theortical + 24 practical) = 55 hours
                                                                                                             marks
                                                         Third Year

                          5st Semester                                                      6th Semester
                             Subjects                                                          Subjects
         Number of                                       Marks                                                     Marks
No
         hours
                                      Title                           No    Credits              Title
                                                      50Theory+                                               50Theory+
                                                      50Practical                                             50Practical
         (Theory 2h,                                                        (Theory 2h,
 29      Practical 3h).
                          Radiology                                 34      Practical 2h)
                                                                                            Pharmacology


                                                      50Theory+                                               50Theory+
         (Theory 2h,                                  50Practical           (Theory 3h,                       50Practical
 30      Practical 4h).   General Pathology                         35      Practical       Oral Pathology
                                                                            3h).

         Theory 2h,                                   50Theory+                                               100 practical
         Practical 4h).                               50Practical            (Practical     Peadiatric
 31                         Operative Dentistry (2)                 36          2h).        Dentistry( 1)

         (Theory 2h,      Public Health, Preventive   60Theory+             Theory 2h,                        50Theory+
         Practical 2h).   and Community Dentistry.    40Practical           Practical       Fixed             50Practical
 32                                                                 37      4h).            Prosthodontics(
                                                                                            2).

         (Theory 1h,                                      100                                                 100 theortical
         Practical 2h).                                theortical           (Theory 2h,      Science of
 33                       Periodontology (1)( Lab)                  38      Practical 2h)    Occlusion

                                                                                                              100 theortical
                                                                            (Theory 2h).     Infection
                                                                    39                       Control

                                                       500marks             11theortical                         700 marks
         9 theortical+
                                                                            +
Total    14 practical     5 subjects                                Total   13practical
                                                                                              7 subjects
         =24hours
                                                                            =24
                                                                                                     Total of marks =1200
     Total of subjects=12           Total of hours( 20 theortical + 27 practical) = 47 hours
                                                                                                            marks
                                                       Fourth Year

                          7st Semester                                                      8nd Semester
                             Subjects                                                         Subjects
         Number of                                      Marks                                                       Marks
No
         hours
                                     Title                           No     Credits              Title
                                                     50Theory+                                                 50Theory+
                                                     50Practical                                               50Practical
         (Theory 1h,                                                        (Theory 1h,     Oral Diseases
 40      Practical 2h).
                          Oral Diseases (1).                        47      Practical 2h)   (2).


                                                     50Theory+                                                 50Theory+
         (Theory 1h,                                 50Practical            (Theory 1h,                        50Practical
 41      Practical 2h).   Operative Dentistry (3).                  48      Practical       Endodontics (2).
                                                                            4h).

         (Theory 1h,                                 50Theory+                                                 50Theory+
         Practical 4h).                              50Practical            (Theory 2h,                        50Practical
                                                                                            Peadiatric
 42                         Endodontics(1).                         49       Practical
                                                                                            Dentistry( 2).
                                                                               4h).

         (Theory 2h,      Periodontology (2).        50Theory+                              Removable          50Theory+
         Practical 4h).                              50Practical            (Theory 2h,     Prosthodontics(    50Practical
 43                                                                 50       Practical      3).
                                                                               4h).

         Theory 1h,                                   50Theory+                             Fixed              50Theory+
         Practical 2h).                               50Practical           (Theory 2h,     Prosthodontics(    50Practical
                          Removable
 44                       Prosthodontics(2).                        51       Practical      3).
                                                                               4h).

         Theory 2h,       Anesthesia and              50Theory+             (Theory 2h,     Anesthesia and     50Theory+
 45      Practical 2h).   Extraction(1).              50Practical   52       Practical      Extraction(2).     50Practical
                                                                               4h).
         Theory 4h,       Orthodontics and           50Theory+
         Practical 4h).   dentofacial orthopedics    50Practical
 46                       (1).

                                                      700marks              10theortical                         600 marks
         12 theortical+
                                                                            + 22
Total    20 practical     7 subjects                                Total   practical
                                                                                              6 subjects
         =32hours
                                                                            =32
                                                                                                      Total of marks =1300
     Total of subjects=12           Total of hours( 22 theortical + 42 practical) = 64 hours
                                                                                                             marks
                                                           Fifth Year
                            st
                           9 Semester                                                         10nd Semester
                            Subjects                                                             Subjects
         Number of                                        Marks                                                       Marks
No
         hours
                                      Title                             No    Credits               Title
                                                       50Theory+                                                 50Theory+
                                                       50Practical                                               50Practical
         (Theory 1h,       Endodontics(3).                                    (Theory 1h,
 53      Practical 4h).                                               60      Practical 4h)
                                                                                               Endodontics(4).


                                                       50Theory+                                                 50Theory+
         (Theory 1h,                                   50Practical            (Theory 1h,      Orthodontics      50Practical
 54      Practical 2h).    Implantology.                              61      Practical        and dentofacial
                                                                              4h).             orthopedics(2).

         (Theory 1h,       Peadiatric Dentistry( 3).   50Theory+                                                 50Theory+
         Practical 4h).                                50Practical            (Theory 1h,                        50Practical
                                                                                               Periodontology
 55                                                                   62       Practical
                                                                                               (3).
                                                                                 4h).

         (Practical 4h).   Removable                   100Practical                            Oral              100Theory
                           Prosthodontics(4).                                 (Theory          Rehabilitation.
 56                                                                   63      2h,).

         Theory 1h,                                     50Theory+                              Anesthesia and    100Practical
         Practical 4h).                                 50Practical            (Practical      Extraction(4).
 57                        Fixed Prosthodontics(4).                   64          4h).

         Theory 2h,        Anesthesia and               50Theory+                               Ethics and       100Theory
         Practical 2h).    Extraction(3).               50Practical             (Theory
 58                                                                   65          2h,).
                                                                                                Forensic
                                                                                                Dentistry.
         Theory 1h,        Operative Dentistry(4).     50Theory+                                                 100Theory
                                                                                               Oral and
         Practical 4h).                                50Practical            (Theory
 59                                                                   66      2h,).
                                                                                               Maxillofacial
                                                                                               Surgery.

         12 theortical+                                 700marks              9theortical+                         600 marks
Total    20 practical      7 subjects                                 Total   16 practical       6 subjects
         =22hours                                                             =25

                                                                                                         Total of marks =1300
     Total of subjects=12            Total of hours( 21 theortical + 36 practical) = 57 hours
                                                                                                                marks
      1.5 Personnel involved in the study program

1.5.1 Constitution form (professors;                         See modules
       contract teachers; academic
       collaborators; full-time/part-time
       academic, technical and
       administrative employees; quality
       and number of jobs)
1.5.2 Counseling time (study counseling,                     Not applicable, no advisor
      consulting hours, tutorials, mentor programs)
1.5.3 Retraining courses for the teaching staff              Available through the office of continiuos
                                                             education in the faculty (in all dental fields)but
                                                             it is not compulsory

      1.6                Quality assurance measures

      In 2007, Damascus University adopted a set of 12 strategic objectives dealing with
      University autonomy, improvement of academic and administrative processes, society
      outreach, and development of a University-wide quality assurance system. Faculties were
      requested to participate in the process of quality assurance. Faculty of Dentistry in
      Damascus University was a pilot study. The office for quality assurance was established
      in 2008. Since 2007, many studies and surveyes have been undertaken at university and
      faculty levels to self evaluate the current status of the dental program.

      1.6.1              Evaluation during the study program (e.g. survey of
      students)
      1.6.1.1         The findings of the University Survey in 2006-2007.
      a. The findings of the University Survey in 2006-2007(staff survey)12:
      1. Number of teaching staff (n=101). Number of teaching staff in samples (n=24).

      2. Percentages of teaching staff in sample to total number of staff in faculty (24%).

      3. 40% of the staff was aged 31-41 years old and 46% 41-50 years old, 7.5% were
            female and the majority had PhDs (95%), part time staff (83%) and academics (79%)
            responded.

      4. 50% of those responding were involved in developing courses, 25% in research
            publications and 50% participating in conferences.

      5. 64% participate in discussion about students; however, the minority use workshops
            rarely as a teaching tool.

  1
      Centre for Quality Assurance (2007). Evaluation of Pedagogic and Administrative Functions, and Mission
      Statement and Strategic Plan for Damascus University. Damascus University.
  2
       M.Dashash, L. Davenport: Internal and external evaluation report 25-11-2008.
    6. Less than half expect the students to use analytical skills and applying their findings
         and also in terms of advancement in language, communication and critical thinking.
         Other transferable skills are favored to encourage team working and cooperation
         within the dental team.

    7. The majority of those who responded to how pedagogical procedures impact on
         student learning was favorable in terms of providing an environment for introducing
         new teaching techniques into the curriculum. Those responding are keen and want to
         participate more fully in staff development meetings. These are rarely interactive.

    8. Teacher rewards are considered to be poor including meeting their needs, acceptable
         salary, increased teaching load with no reward, and insufficient office space.

    9. Direct questions about staff satisfaction with their salary, awards and incentives, office
         space and equipment was poor but they were less worried about teaching load, quality
         of students, laboratory facilities, lecture halls and library.

    10. The staff would encourage their children to attend the university and also would
          want to be a faculty member at Damascus.

    b. The findings of the University Survey in 2006-2007(student survey)3,4
    1.    Number of students in samples ( n= 103). The response rate for the questionnaire
          (8%).
    2.    Of those responding 60% were male, 67% are aged 21-24 years, 49% from the
          Damascus area with 21% from other countries. Family members had influenced their
          choice of career, and that the DDS provided better opportunities to make money on
          graduation.
    3.     98% are proud to that they will graduate from the University of Damascus.
    4.    65% would work as dentists after graduation, after five years half would be working
          on their own, and a third would have immigrated to seek work elsewhere. Of those
          wishing to attend graduate studies a third would seek entrance to Syrian universities
          and a further third to universities in Western Europe.


3
  Centre for Quality Assurance (2007). Evaluation of Pedagogic and Administrative Functions, and Mission
Statement and Strategic Plan for Damascus University. Damascus University.
4
   M.Dashash, L. Davenport: Internal and external evaluation report 25-11-2008.
5.   The majority (91%) considered it necessary to learn English, but the use of English
     texts less convincing as attendance at gaining further English language skills and in
     the main students considered that their English skills had not improved during the
     programme.

6.   IT facilities : 75% considered that each first year should be provided with a laptop
     for their personal use and paid for on a monthly basis over a four year period. The
     internet is used by most of the students to carry out topic search.

7.   There is evidence of conflict if two teachers share teaching in that learning is
     negatively affected (76%). It was thought that to succeed in examinations it was
     necessary to use the exact wording of the teachers (66%). 55% used text books and
     handouts as their main source of information

8.   Access to the Library and books was variable.

9.   The majority thought that the final course grade should be 50:50% semester work:
     final exam rather than any other combination.

10. The reality of poor attendance at lectures was that the students were too busy with
     other jobs outside the faculty.

1.6.1.2        The findings of Stakeholders meeting in 2009
     1. The stakeholders’ workshop took place on 27 January 2009 to discuss the process
          of educational reform in the faculty of Dentistry.

     2. Students, faculty members, participants representing the Ministry of Health,
          Ministry of Higher Education, military services and Syrian Dental Association
          were invited.

     3.   Stakeholders discussed and approved the mission statement adopted by the
          faculty.

     4. Stakeholders confirmed society’s need for a dental graduate fit for 21st century,
          who can fulfill the admission requirements of leading dental colleges from around
          the world.
      5. Stakeholders stressed the need to undertake the necessary measures by the faculty
          to improve the delivered programme in response to continued changes in dental
          knowledge; materials and equipments; methods of delivering oral health care;
          demands of dental students and graduates; and the ever-changing expectations of
          society for oral healthcare.

      6. Stakeholders addressed the issue of continuous professional development, and
          improving teaching and learning methods in order to create a new dental
          curriculum which emphasizes evidence-based dentistry.

1.6.1.3 The findings of the study about attitudes of dental students towards teaching 'English in
Dentistry'5

 1. The response rate was 93 % (107/115 questionnaires). The participation included 17
       third year, 35 fourth year and 55 fifth year students.
 2. About 103(97%) of students were interested in learning 'English in Dentistry',
       considered it an important and wanted it to be improved.
 3. Only 4(3%) of students were not interested in learning as they were studying French.
 4. The majority (88%) answered that they need it to travel abroad to obtain higher
       education.
 5. About 103(97%) of students reported that they need it to improve their scientific
       standards.
 6. 101(96%) thought that this would be necessary to read scientific articles, 97(90%) of
       students thought that this would be desirable to attend and understand English- speaking
       visitors.
 7.     93(88%) of students wanted the topic to study abroad and set international exams
 8.     70% to present lectures in international dental meetings.
 9.     43(40%) of students wanted to learn 'English in dentistry' to be able to write and
        publish in international journals and 37(35%) wanted it to be able to critically
        appraise scientific articles.


   5
    Dashash M. Yousef M. Does the Level of Knowledge Delivered in 'English in Dentistry' affect the
   Quality of Future Dental Education? Conference Proceeding in the International Conference for
   Education, Research and Innovation, Spain, 2009.
10. The highest percentage of students (69%) indicated that the burden of other dental
    topics in each semester prevented them from improving their knowledge in 'English
    in Dentistry'.
11. About 22% of students believed that there is no time to learn 'English in Dentistry'
    and that the dental curriculum is not designed to efficiently allocate time for
    improving English.
12. Only 9% of students indicated that they were not interested in learning 'English in
    Dentistry' as they were learning German or French.
13. A total of 73(69%) of students wanted other dental subjects to be taught in both
    Arabic and English language so they can improve their dental terminology.
14. Only 13(12%) of students wanted the dental curriculum to be delivered in English.
15. About 5(5%) of students suggested the exchange of students and staff for
    improvement.
16. Only 3(2%) of students suggested learning in groups so they can improve their
    dental vocabulary and communication.
17. The responses of the three classes were not significantly different.
18. 67% of students were with Arabization, 69% think that curriculum delivered in
    Arabic is easier to understand. However, 26% of students read Arabic books, 57%
    read English books, 17% read both.
19. 77% think that Arabization can change the real meaning of the word.

Conclusion: it is interesting to see the positive attitudes among undergraduate students
towards learning 'English in Dentistry' and that students would like the faculty to
improve the topic.

    students wanted the current 'English in Dentistry' to be improved in order to be
    able to develop their scientific standards, read, write       and appraise scientific
    articles, attend and present in international conferences, study and set international
    exams and understand English speaking visitors.
    It is necessary to ascertain students' needs, consider new materials and methods for
    teaching and learning 'English in Dentistry', allocate sufficient time for teaching
    and learning.
The majority of students agreed that the curriculum should be delivered in Arabic
however; they prefer to read English text books rather than Arabic textbooks. This might
reflect the fact that Arabic translation and books produced in Arabic are not of high
quality in terms of translation or publication.

1.6.1.4 The findings of the study about patient satisfaction towards the services
                 offered by the Faculty of dentistry6
    1.      The participation included 131 patients from 6 departments in the faculty.
    2.      56% of patients had relatives and friends in the faculty, 17% brought by students
          and 10% brought by employees in the faculty. 13% previously came to the faculty
          seeking treatment. 2% referred from private clinics and 2% heard about the
          treatment from the media.
    3.      71% treated by postgraduates, 22% by undergraduates, 5%by staff, and 2% by
          PhD students.
    4.      27% seek treatment in the faculty because it has good reputation, 18% because
          the treatment is free, 16% because the faculty adheres to scientific evidence, 14%
          seek treatment because the treatment is free and good as university staff has good
          experience, 13% seek treatment because operating dentist is one of their friends or
          relatives, 8% because of the clinical experience the faculty owns, 2% because of
          good location and 2% because of all reasons mentioned.
    5.      24% had problem with transportation to reach the faculty.
    6.      15% had problem to reach the department inside the faculty.
    7.      14% were not satisfied with the environment surrounding the operating field.
    8.      60% were not satisfied with the waiting time before starting treatment.
    9.      70% were not satisfied with waiting time before treatment in every visit.
    10.     85% had full explanations about the treatment provided and treatment options.
    11.     76% had treatment for all problems they had.
    12.     95% were satisfied with treatment provided.
    13.     5% were not satisfied because of the waiting time, or because of the lack of
          quality of treatment provided.
6
 Dashash M, Hadad R, Yasseen O, Khattab R, Houri N, Saadi M. patient satisfaction towards the services
offered by the Faculty of dentistry. Study undertaken as part of market need analysis for the Centre for
Quality Assurance, Damascus University, Syria.
    14.      40% suggested improving WC, 20% suggested improving reception facilities,
          14% suggested improve guiding signs, 1% suggested improving equipments, 14%
          suggested improving elevators, and 11% suggested improving waiting room(
          n=35).
         Conclusion: It is very interesting to note that the majority of patients are satisfied
          with preventive and treatment procedures offered by the departments investigated.
          Facilities, infrastructure, waiting time, environment of reception, waiting room, and
          operating field should be improved. Time allocated for every patient should be
          managed.

1.6.2 Evaluation of the success of study program (e.g. survey of
graduates)7
1.6.2.1            The findings of the study about attitudes of dental graduates towards
                   the current curriculum delivered in the faculty.
                  All dental graduates in 2008 participated in this study(n=193).
                  Students filled their questionnaires after setting their national exam.
                  26% of dental graduates had level upon graduation greater than 75%, 35%
                   between 70-75%,35% between 60-70% and 4% of graduates between 50-
                   60%.
                  Students were asked to judge themselves (very good-good-fair – poor)
                   about their basic behavior, knowledge and skills gained in the faculty.
                  Percentages of (very good) will only be presented as the all investigated
                   issues were considered to be essential and must be owned by a dental
                   graduate.
                  Ethical and behavior issues: 41% considered themselves as very good in
                   patient care, 40% can take informed consent, 41% can follow health and
                   safety procedures, and 42% can adhere to infection control procedures at a
                   very good level.



7
 Dashash 2009, Attitudes of dental graduates towards the current curriculum delivered in the faculty, Study
submitted to Centre for Quality Assurance, Damascus University, Syria.
   Personal issues: 20% can communicate with patients effectively, 21 %
    can work independently, 10% are very good in time management.
   Professional issues: 24% considered themselves as very good in taking
    patient history, 13% have very good knowledge in systemic diseases
    related to dental practice, 5% are very good in managing emergency care
    in dental setting, 15% can do dental examination properly, 8% can provide
    with differential diagnosis, 17% can refer patients properly, 23% assessed
    themselves as very good in writing prescription, 8% in writing medical
    report, 34% can take and interpret radiograph, 23% can discuss treatment
    options and discuss treatment planning.
   Clinical issues: 66% considered themselves very good in tooth
    preparation, 22% in      endodontic treatment, 23% in periodontal
    management, 9% in management of oral infections, 15% in behavior
    management, 28% in applying complete denture, 26% in applying partial
    denture, 20% in applying space maintainer, 16% in defining malocclusion,
    13% in providing simple orthodontic treatment, 45% in designing and
    applying crown, 51% in extracting tooth, 19% in performing simple
    surgical operation.
   Informatics and research methods: 5% assessed themselves as very
    good in using new dental technology and dental materials, 11% were very
    good in data management and patient records, 34% as very good in
    computer technology and informatics, and 12% can undertake simple
    scientific research.
   Conclusion: obviously, findings are not so encouraging. Students
    addressed lack of some essential skills (adherence to infection control,
    health and safety procedures, emergency care, writing prescription and
    referral letter, and discussing treatment options) which are not well
    considered in the current curriculum. Moreover, the majority lacks some
    essential clinical skills such as doing endodontic treatment and performing
    simple surgical operation (Biopsy).
1.6.2.2     The correlation between baccalaureate marks and academic acheivment in
dentistry8

         All dental graduates who participated in national exam were invited to fill in the
          questionnaire ( n=189).
         66% of dental graduates had highly educated fathers and 38% had highly
          educated mothers.
         19% of dental graduates came from rich to very rich family ( > 50,000SR/mnth).
         Students were asked to judge themselves( yes- to some extent- no, reason) about
          their basic behavior and self satisfaction. Percentages of "yes" will only be
          presented as follows;
         52% considered themselves as capable to achive their goals in dental career, 81%
          had self satisfaction about their appearance, 70% belived that they can
          communicate effectively with others and solve problems.About 60% belived that
          they can accept constructive criticism and 47% can work under pressure, whilst
          27% approved that they have depression.
         Approximatly half of students (54%) reported that they study at home less than 15
          hours per week, whilst 8% study for more than 25 hour per week.
         When students were asked about their preparation for exam, 50% of them
          reported that they study the subject, understand and summarize it before exam.
          16% reported that they study; understand the subject and also search references
          for further information. Only 5% of students reported that they rely on previous
          examination papers and only revise them before exam.
         When students were asked about lecture attendance, 38% reported that they attend
          lectures and take notes from teacher, 29% mentioned that they do not attend
          lectures but they make sure to study educational slides, notes and books. Only 10
          % of students reported that they search in the library for further information about
          the topic.




8
  Abu-Hamed B, Dashash M. Assuring quality in Higher Education; The starting point is baccalaureate,
study prepared as part of Master degree.
         When students were asked about their satisfaction towards academic achievement
          in the faculty, 34% were happy with their achivment, 22% were happy with their
          thortical knowledge, 36% were happy with their clinical skills gained in the
          faculty, and 21% were satisfied with the learning environment.
         When students were asked about the relation between baccalaureate marks and
          academic acheivment, only 20% responded that the backluarte marks are good
          indicators for academic achivment in dentistry. However, the majority 87%
          belived that the teaching and learning methods in secondary schools do not
          prepare for university entry.
         About 75% reported that they will seek postgraduate study in Syrian universities,
          9% and 16% will travel abroad for a job and for further education respectively.
         There was a significant difference between:
       The average achieved in biology subject and the average of third and fifth
          academic year.
       The average achieved in Chemistry and and the average of second and third year.
       The average of Physics and the average of fifth year.
       The average of Mathematics and total average of all years.
          Conclusion:
          The admission system should be reformed and should depend on scientific
          subjects, particularly, mathematics.

1.6.3      Reconciliation and further development of the teaching and
examination plan (e.g. by study commissions)

Quality assurance measures in the faculty are restricted to the assessement of the current
situation, undetaking research and supervising the curriculum transformation.
2.    Institution

2.1       General information on the institution involved


The first nucleus of the faculty of Dentistry was established in 1919 where Medical
Institute stated to establish a dental branch related to the Institute. Dental practitioners in
the country were then called to set training courses which permit them to legally practice
dentistry.
In October 1921, the general knowledge Directorate agreed to establish a Dental Division
in Tekeya Sulaymaniyah in which dental students can get their knowledge and skills in
dentistry for four years. The first group of students graduated in 1925 having a degree of
doctor of dentistry and surgery.
Since the opening of dental division, the institute set considerable effort through
equipping its clinics and labs and through overcoming the difficulties encountered,
especially with regard to providing sufficient teaching staff.
In 1942, Dental Division moved to the ground floor related to the national hospital
buildings and the dental division became allied to medical school until 1959.
Since then, dental division started to accept students from different nationalities from
Arabic world such as Iraq, Jordan, Egypt, Lebanon and Saudi Arabia as well as Syrian
students. They all were the cornerstone in the dissemination of Arabic medical sciences
in the Arab World.
Having available facilities and necessary qualifications, In 1959, an executive register
related to the law of universities' regulation was issued to consider the dental division as
an independent faculty related to Damascus University.


The independence of the Faculty of Dentistry was an important factor in the rapid
evolution and growth of the faculty with its own private, independent staff and facilities.


A large number of teaching assistant was sent to get higher education abroad to return to
the faculty as members of teaching staff in order to provide students with scientific
knowledge, experience and skills and meet the needs of dental health.


A diploma for postgraduate studies was launched for paediatric dentistry in 1973/1974.
In 1976/1977 crowns and bridges diploma was also launched. More other diplomas were
opened in 1977/1978 to provide specialisations in maxillofacial surgery, prosthodontics,
operative dentistry, and periodontology. In 198, the orthodontics department was
established while oral pathology department was established in 1985/1986. More
recently, oral medicine department was established in 2003-2004.


It worth to mention, that the Faculty of Dentistry is one of the largest dental faculties in
the Middle East. The new construction was opened in 1995, consisting of four floors
with 6477 m2 each. The new building was established with neighbouring buildings for
the faculty of medicine, pharmacy and for a massive hospital (Assad University) to
constitute a huge scientific bedrock of medical sciences, supporting each other.
The College has approximately 500 dental units spread over seven clinics for
undergraduate students and nine clinics for postgraduate students, in addition to laser
clinics, dental implant clinic, and TMJ clinics.


Faculty of Dentistry offers a variety of free services for society as well as it is considered
as a Centre for training, education and research.
It contains 15 laboratories for practicing different aspects of dentistry and related fields
and has one lab for using internet and has one simulation laboratory. Additionally, the
faculty has small specialised oral surgery hospital (40 beds) which has two equipped
operation rooms, one room for emergency care and one for minor oral surgery.


The faculty has 86 member of teaching staff distributed between Professor, associate
professor and assistant Professor and lecturers plus 10 instructors and about 30 teaching
assistants who have either external or internal scholarship.
The faculty has library with two reading rooms and includes 1800 books and periodicals
in all dental disciplines in addition to a recently established electronic library which has
recent DVDs and CDs about Dentistry.
The faculty has an office for continues professional education which can provide
updated dental knowledge for practitioners, postgraduate and academic staff through a
specialized courses, periodic scientific conferences as well as clinical training in various
dental specialist topics .


2.1.1 Description of the institution (departments involved, laboratories, scientific
      background)
1. A total of 15 different laboratories; for basic science and practical work( For
     example, microbiology, pathology, physiology, cytology, pharmacology, medical
     physics and chemistry, dental materials, restorative, removable and fixed
     prosthodontics and orthodontics) are available in the faculty campus to provide
     dental graduates with proper practical training before practicing clinical dentistry
     in clinics.
2. The structure of the Faculty of Dentistry is also made up of 7 Clinics for
     undergraduates and 9clinics for postgraduates with 500 dental units. Recently, a
     clinic for Laser application has been launched together with two clinics for
     treating TMJ disorders, and for placement of implants. The faculty has also
     allocated one clinic for orofacial prosthodontics and devoted one for children
     with special needs.
3. IT services is also available in the faculty as there are one computer cluster for
     internet facilities and one ICDL lab equipped with 50 computers to provide staff
     and students with computer driving license. One audio-visual lab with
     computerized simulators is also available for training purposes when needed.
4. A small hospital for performing minor oral surgery and treating disabled patients
     under general anesthesia is also located in the faculty campus and has 40 beds and
     2 surgeries.
5.   A new nursery school related to the faculty is also open to academic staff and
     employees to provide care for their children from 6 month to 5 years.
6. Office for continuous professional training was established in 2003. It creates, in
     collaboration with external well-recognised experts in the world, a new range of
     courses, for qualified dentists who want to develop their knowledge of the latest
     dentistry methods, equipment and techniques.
7. The Faculty of Dentistry houses a library with more than 1800 textbooks,
     dictionaries and thesis. Two convenient halls are available for reading. Recent
     textbooks and thesis in dental sciences and related basic sciences are mostly
     available. Important periodicals are also available. However, recent periodicals
     (after 2003)are available only through HINARI (Obviously not all dental
        journals). An electronic library provided with electronic books and educational
        films is underway to support learning in the faculty.

The faculty offers the following postgraduate studies(MSc, PhD):
   1. Peadiatric Dentistry.
   2. Orthodontics and dentofacial orthopedics.
   3. Operative Dentistry.
   4. Endodontics
   5. Periodontology.
   6. Oral Surgery.
   7. Fixed Prosthodontics.
   8. Removable Prosthodontics.
   9. Oral Histology and Pathology.
   10. Oral Medicine.

2.1.2   Committees related to the teaching in the study programs to be accredited

                Council of the department.

                Council of the faculty.

                Council of the university (scientific committee, scientific council, student affair,

                 research and postgraduate studies, administrative committee).

                Council of the higher education( minister, presedent of universities, other

                 ministries).


2.1.3    Research facilities, focus of research activities, R&D activities in relation to
        study programs to be accredited)

Research is undertaken by academic staff and postgraduate dental students as part of their
Msc or PhD degree. Until 2010, approximately, 70 studies have been carried out by staff
and 200 undertaken by postgraduate students. Research areas are structured into the
following:
    1. Basic Sciences Research

            Genetic research
            Dental biomaterials and biomechanics

  2. Health Science Research
        Health services and epidemiological research
        Behavioral Science research and pain control
        Research of craniofacial growth and development (pathogenesis and
         intervention).
      Caries and diagnostic research
      Laser application
      Restorative dental research.
      Evaluation of different orthodontic treatments.
      Oral implants
      Oral and maxillofacial surgery research
Research partners

      Ministry of Education.
      Ministry of Social Affair and labor
      Faculty of Medicine
      National research instituations
Funding and collaboration

         Damascus University financially support all research undertaken by
          postgraduate students.
         University of Versailles (France).
         Funding provided by researchers (personal funding).
2.1.4   Study programs, courses and degrees (including opportunities
        for further study).
DDS graduates have opportunities to work in general practice, community dental service,
hospital practice, armed forces, national and international organisations. In addition,
graduates can be involved in teaching and research aitivities after gaining Msc or/ and
PhD degrees.
Further specialization and training are recently much required. The faculty offers the
following specializations:
    1. Orthodontics and dentofacial orthopedics.
    2. Peadiatric Dentistry.
    3. Operative Dentistry.
    4. Endodontics.
    5. Periodontology.
    6. Oral Surgery.
    7. Fixed Prosthodontics.
    8. Removable Prosthodontics.
    9. Oral Pathology.
    10. Oral Medicine.

Studying abroad
Traveling fellowships and government posts may offer opportunities overseas (mostly to
the UK, Germany and France to obtain PhD degree.

2.1.5   Special strength in teaching and research

Strength in teaching
    Most of academic staff are PhD holders ( n=86 ).
       A student to prof ratio is relatively good (11/1)
       There are specific clear regulations and rules for each department supervised by
        the head of the department and the committee for each department. Issues related
        to educational and strategic plans are discussed in each department weekly and
        submitted to faculty council which is held regularly every two weeks.
       Adherence of teaching staff to educational plans with regard to teaching, learning
        and examination regulations, rules, number of hours for theoretical and practical
        courses.
      There is no significant difference between student's enrollment into the faculty
       and graduation( 97% of students graduate after spending 5 years, 3% spend 6
       years to graduate).
      A compulsory attendance for practical sessions (for each subject, it is only
       allowed for student to be absent in 3 practical sessions).
      A student to Prof ratio is relatively good(1/24).
      Wide acceptance to the concept of curriculum change.
      Presence of national examination for exploring competencies of graduates.
      Desgnied national academic reference standards for dentistry under supervision of
       ministry of higher education.
Strength in research
              Increasd Quantity and quality of research undertaken by Msc, PhD
               students and academic staff.
              Fund Msc, PhD, and academic staff research.
              Establishing reward mechanisim for international publications.
Opportunites
              Establishment of quality assurance bodies at university and faculty levels.
              Established 4 new dental faculties related to Syrian private universities to
               ease the burden on public universities.
              Began examinations for exploring competencies of graduates.
              Adopted national academic reference standards for all specialties
               including dentistry.
              Assess new admission criteria to enroll dental students
               (underway).


Weakness
            Incentives system to academic professors is not available.
            Accountability system is not available.
            There is no simple mechanism for human resources management and
           improvement for administrative and academic staff.
            There is no mechanism for electronic documentations related to
           regulations, lectures, patient's records, research undertaken and statistical
           information.
        Dental specializations are not selected according to the needs of society,
       no harmonization between specializations and market needs.
        Few and limited specialties compared to the number of graduates. New
       specializations which will be very important such as public health,
       community dentistry and health informatics are not considered.
        There are no opportunities for study supported by non-governmental
       sectors.
        Lack of full scientific descriptions for each subject at the beginning of the
       year or even a general meeting which can prevents duplicates, overlapping
       and determines responsibilities.
        Increasing stress and pressure on students because of the huge theoretical
       information they received in the first three years and huge practical works in
       the last 2 years. Their attitude is to concentrate on mark not information.
        Lack of critical thinking and learning skills, weak academic level of
       graduate.
        No program to familiarize the student to his/her rights and obligations.
        There is no feedback system to know students opinion towards teaching.
        No mechanism to assist student achievement or to provide advice and
       guidance.
Threats

     Current and regulations related to teaching strategy and assessment system(
      moving from teacher to student centred approach).
     Concern is expressed regarding assessment methods. It is summative rather
      than formative.
     Too much time is devoted to laboratory based techniques which can be
      performed by technician in dentist' daily life
2.1.6   Academic personnel for the course (CV)

See Appendix


Personnel involved in Teaching
          Number of Academic Staff in Each
                   Department




Surgery                    operative       Periodontology
number of staff
Removable Prosthodontics   Orthodontics    Fixed Prosthodontics
Peadiatric Dentistry       Oral Medicine   Histology
Biology                    Statistics
Name             Degree     Specialization   Country of   Date of PhD
                                             PhD
                             Oral Surgery
Haytham          PhD        Oral Surgery     France       1985
Bahhah
Atef Naddaf      PhD        Oral Surgery     Russia       1987
Munir            PhD        Oral Surgery     Syria        1989
Harfouch
Eissa Wahbeh     PhD        Oral Surgery     Germany      1990
Mohammad         PhD        Oral Surgery     France       1991
Safwan Jaber
Issam Khouri     PhD        Oral Surgery     Russia       1993
Mazen Zenaty     PhD        Oral Surgery     Syria        1997
Zaven Garabed    PhD        Oral Surgery     Armenia      1998
Ali Gbara        PhD        Oral Surgery     Germany      2001

Omar             PhD        Oral Surgery     Syria        2002
Heshmeh
Al-moudallal     PhD        Oral Surgery     Syria        2003
Yasser
Khaldoun         PhD        Oral Surgery     Germany      2005
Darwich
Bassel Brad      PhD        Oral Surgery     Germany      2005
Samer kasabah    PhD        Oral Surgery     Czech        2005
                                             Republic
Hassan Jaffo     PhD       Oral Surgery      Syria        2006
                          Operative Dentistry
Faisal           PhD       Operative         France       1974
Dayyoub
Saffouh Alboni   PhD        Operative        Egypt        1977
Nada Alhomsi     PhD        Operative        France       1991
HIsham Al-       PhD        Operative        Ukraine      1993
Afif
Mohamad          PhD        Operative        Syria        1994
Salem Rekab
Arwa Khair       PhD        Operative        Syria        1996
Samer            PhD        Operative        Syria        1998
Khaddour
Roula Alboni     PhD        Operative        Syria        2000
Samar Akil       PhD        Operative        Syria        2001
Kinda layous     PhD        Operative        Syria        2002
Mohamad          PhD        Operative        Syria        2003
Osama Jabban
Hassan Achour    PhD        Operative        Syria        2003
Souad Abboud    PhD       Operative        Syria     2003
Taher Al-Aja    PhD       Operative        Syria     2003

Oula Yasssin    PhD       Operative        Syria     2004
Mouhammad       PhD       Operative        UK        2007
Al-Tayan
                          Periodontology
Mohamed Atef    PhD       Periodontology France      1979
Darwish
Ousama          PhD       Periodontology   Germany   1989
Ibrahim
Razan Khatab    PhD       Periodontology   France    1992
Sharif          PhD       Periodontology   Syria     1994
Alashkar
Tarek Shwaiki   PhD       Periodontology   Germany   1996
Roida Saimeh    PhD       Periodontology   Syria     1998
Suleiman        PhD       Periodontology   Syria     1998
Dayoub
Mohamed         PhD       Periodontology   Syria     2004
Monther Al-
Sabbagh
Ali Abou        PhD       Periodontology   UK        2006
Suliman
                      Removable Prosthodontics
Josef Assaf     PhD        Removable       France    1988
                           Prosthodontics
Ghassan Wazir   PhD        Removable       Russia    1993
                           Prosthodontics
Eyad            PhD        Removable       Russia    1994
Alsharaani                 Prosthodontics
Mohammad h.     PhD        Removable       Syria     2002
Al- Saadi                  Prosthodontics
Alaa Salloum    PhD        Removable       Syria     2004
                           Prosthodontics
Ammar           PhD        Removable       Syria     2004
Mustafa                    Prosthodontics
                        Fixed Prosthodontics
Fandi           PhD        Fixed           France    1981
Alsharaani                 Prosthodontics
Omar Aladel     PhD        Fixed           France    1985
                           Prosthodontics
Seham sais      PhD        Fixed           Germany   1989
                           Prosthodontics
Mirza Allaf     PhD        Fixed           Syria     1998
                           Prosthodontics
Jehad Abu-       PhD     Fixed            Syria      2000
Nassar                   Prosthodontics
Eyad swaid       PhD     Fixed            Syria      2001
                         Prosthodontics
                          Orthodontics
Muhammad         PhD     Orthodontics     Germany    1988
Yousef
Naser Sawwan     PhD     Orthodontics     Russia     1992
Ayham Kadah      PhD     Orthodontics     Germany    1995
Imad Koaied      PhD     Orthodontics     Germany    2002
Muhieddin Al-    PhD     Orthodontics     Italy      2004
Arashi
Luai mahayni     PhD     Orthodontics      Germany   2005
Rania Haddad     PhD     Orthodontics      UK        2005
Chadi Bridi      PhD     Orthodontics      USA       2007
Mowaffak Ajaj    PhD     Orthodontics      UK        2008
Yazan jahjah     PhD     Orthodontics      Syria     2009
Khiath Habeeb    PhD     Orthodontics      UK        2010
                       Peadiatric Dentistry
Mohamed          PhD     Peadiatric        Russia    1989
Altinawi                 Dentistry
Muhammad         PhD     Peadiatric        Russia    1994
Bashir                   Dentistry
Almunakel
Muhannad         PhD     Peadiatric       Syria      2002
lafloof                  Dentistry
Nada Bshara      PhD     Peadiatric       Syria      2002
                         Dentistry
Shaza koshaji    PhD     Peadiatric       Syria      2003
                         Dentistry
Mayssoon         PhD     Peadiatric       UK         2005
Dashash                  Dentistry

                         Oral Medicine
Mahmood Abd      PhD     Oral Medicine    Russia     1993
Alhakk
Ammar            PhD     Oral Medicine    Syria      2002
Mashlah
Muhammad         PhD     Oral Medicine    France     2005
Iyad Al-Haffar

Easter Jury      PhD     Oral Medicine    UK         2008
Omar             PhD     Oral Medicine    UK         2008
Hamadeh
                            Histology
Ahmad            PhD     Histology         Russia    1994
Mandili
Sharif Barakat   PhD     Histology         Syria     2005
Nabil Kushaji    PhD     Histology         Belgium   2005
Mamdouh          PhD     Histology         Egypt     2007
muhareb
                       Biology and statistics
Hussein Abou-    PhD     Biology            France   1978
Hamed
Ibrahim          PhD     Biology           Russia    1987
Haddad
Ala Eldin        PhD     Biology           France    1996
Choukaife
Rim Nadra        PhD     Biology           France    2004
Muhammad         PhD     Statistics        Germany   2008
Zino
2.1.7   Contract teachers, other special professorships, non-academic personnel

2.1.8   Non-academic personnel
Laboratory Technicians

Name                                             Laboratory
Naser Ketabi                                     Oral pathology
Muhanad Issa                                     Fixed Prosthodontics
Nawras Serhan                                    Removable Prosthodontics

2.2. Resources
2.2.1 Resources for teaching (current budget)
2.2.1.1 Personnel resources (teaching appointments, guest speakers,
        student assistants, etc.)

    Status           Teaching (Theory        Counseling of               Supervision of
                         and Praxis             students              examinations/semester
                      Hours per week      Hours per week
                     Full-    Part-time     Full-       Part-         Full-time     Part-time
                     time                   time         time
     Full              3          19             Not for             All academic staff are
  Professors                              undergraduate but for    involved in examinations
    Assoc.             5         20           postgraduate        partialy or fully according to
  Professors                                    students.           their academic position.
 Doctors (Ass.         5         35
  Professors)
  Assistants          34

     Chief             0         15
  Technicians
     Dean                        1

  Vice-Dean      1               1

   Head of             5         5
  Department

2.2.1.2 Physical resources (excursions, equipment maintenance, teaching materials, etc.)
        Excursions not applicable

          Equipment maintenance through engeneering office in the faculty. Routine and paper
           procedures makes maintenance complicated.
          Teaching materials: white board, projectors, simulatiors, and equipments are good to
           some extent.

2.2.1.3 Investment funds (purchase of equipment, computer equipment, etc.
       All essential expenditure for educational, administrative, research of the faculty are
        carried through financial affairs in Damascus University.The faculty budget
        consists of two main sources; Damascus university and the office for continuous
        development. Fund granted from Damascus university is for paying salaries for
        academic and administrative staff and is spent on dental/medical equipments and
        materials for educational and research purposes as well as consumables ( heating,
        electricity, water and cleaning) as well as for the maintenance of machines and
        equipments.
       In addition, all administrative and academic workers of the faculty are provided
        with additional supportive funding from the office for professional development.
        This office which is run by the dean of the faculty and the faculty council,
        organizes several short and long courses, conferences, exhebitions for general
        dental practicioners and staff, can provide extra financial support to staff and
        faculty.

2.2.2 Premises (lecture halls, seminar rooms, student workplaces, etc)
         4lecture halls, I seminar room for postgraduate students, one reading room in
library, clinics, laboratories

2.2.3 Investment resources for major equipment purchased over the last three years
     or due to be purchased

Year              General payment      Scientific             Equipments    Electricity bills
                                       research
2007              9,516996SP           7,686,632 SP           6,480,000SP 406,305SP
2008              14,683606SP          7,539,378 SP           23,879,000SP 1,189,673SP
2009              11,836550SP          7,812,375SP            6,549,000SP 1,791,746SP
                                                              25,526,850SP


Year 2007
Department                                       price( SR)
implantology                                     11375
Endodntics                                       32500
hospital                                         181000
laser                                            175000
Pediatric dentistry                              88000

Fixed prosthodontics                             290000

Surgery                                          499000
Orthodontics                                     158500
Removable prosthodontics                         22500

Total                                            1,457,875
Year 2008
Department                 price( SR)
implantology               0
Endodntics                 105400
hospital                   0
laser                      0
Pediatric dentistry        39000
Fixed prosthodontics       41000
Surgery                    0
Orthodontics               213000
Removable prosthodontics   0
Pathology                  160000
Oral medicince             196000
Biology                    36650
Total                      791050

Year 2009
Department                 price( SR)
implantology               6800
Endodntics                 554529
hospital                   0
laser                      0
Pediatric dentistry        8500
Fixed prosthodontics       170500
Surgery                    0
Orthodontics               0
Removable prosthodontics   0
Pathology                  0
Oral medicince             78000
Biology                    21500
Periodontology             69000
Total                      908829

Year 2010

Department                 Price( SR)
implantology               228775
Endodntics                 179700
hospital                   36450
laser                      0
Pediatric dentistry        0
Fixed prosthodontics       0
Surgery                    34000
Orthodontics               480000
Removable prosthodontics   43000
Pathology                                           0
Oral medicince                                      28175
Biology                                             0
Periodontology                                      0
Total                                               1030100


2.3     Support for teaching and studying

                  One reading room, one small library with 1800 textbooks, access to E-journals
                   through science direct, GALE and HINARI.
                  Recently, access through scopus is underway.

2.3.1   Data processing facilities
            Not applicable

2.3.1.1 Data processing equipment, (reinvestment, programs,
        program support, maintenance).
             Not applicable, no health informatics system in place.

2.3.1.2 Supervision of students/qualifications of the personnel.
             No advisor culture

2.3.1.3 Accessibility, number of computers/pools, opening times, etc.
            20 computers in computer cluster.
            6 computers in electronic library
            Wireless system ( point)

2.3.1.4 Description of tasks carried out by students on PCs (workstations)
            no
2.3.1.5 Restrictions/hindrances
           Limited openening hours( 9-2 pm).
           Slow internet.
           Berocracy
           No autonomy

2.3.2 Library/literature/media services
         See appendix related to books and periodical available in library.

2.3.2.1 Stock of publications (monograph titles, periodicals, etc.)
             Limited number of recent periodicals.

2.3.2.2 Other media (maps, microfiche, audio)

                  Not available

2.3.2.3 Purchasing/responsibility, coordination, etc.
           Through the university
2.3.2.4 Accessibility for students/electronic access
              Access to E-journals through science direct, GALE and HINARI, and recently
               through scopus and science direct.
2.3.2.5 Qualifications of the personnel
           Librarian (two years diploma in library studies).
2.3.2.6 Workplaces for students
           Clinics and laboratories.

2.3.2.7 Restrictions/hindrances
            Limited work place for students.

2.3.3 Provision of laboratory facilities/equipment
2.3.3.1 Equipment and technical status
           See appendix for equipments
2.3.3.2 Supervision of students/qualifications of the personnel

                No advisor culture for undergraduate, supervison for postgraduate, Msc,and PhD
                 students is available
2.3.3.3 Accessibility, workplaces, opening times
             Through session only during opening hours only.
2.3.3.4 Restrictions/hindrances
             More facilities are needed to make electronic access to journal more available.
2.4 Students and graduates of the institutions involved (presentation and interpretation of data)
2.4.1 First year students listed by study programs



First Cohort

First year students 2005-2006

Students enrolled in the academic year 2005-2006                  222
Number of students from the previous year                         45
Students who came from other universities to ….                   5
Dissmissed students                                               12
Total                                                             284
Number of students passed to the second year                      236
Number of students who failed the exams                           48

Success rate: 83%
Failure rate: 17%

Second year students 2006-2007

Number of students passed to the third year                       240
Number of students who failed the exams                           41
Number of students from the previous year                         33
Students who came from other faculties to ….                      4
Dissmissed students                                               8
Third year students 2007-2008

Number of students passed to the fourth year       239
Number of students who failed the exams            29
Number of students from the previous year          25
Students who came from other faculties to ….       0
Dissmissed students                                3


Fourth year students2008-2009
Number of students passed to the fith year         235
Number of students who failed the exams            22
Number of students from the previous year          18
Students who came from other faculties to ….       0
Dissmissed students                                2

Fifth year students 2009-2010

Number of students registerd in 2009-2010          241
Number of graduates                                207
Students who came from other faculties to ….       0
Dissmissed students                                0


Second Cohort

First year students 2004-2005

Students enrolled in the academic year 2004/2005         133
Number of students from the previous year                61
Students who came from other faculties to ….             2
Dissmissed students                                      11
Total                                                    207
Number of students passed to the second year             162
Number of students who failed the exams                  45

Second year students 2005-2006
Number of students passed to the third year              188
Number of students who failed the exams                  33
Number of students from the previous year                48
Students who came from other faculties to …..            1
Dissmissed students                                      10
Third year students 2006-2007

Number of students passed to the fourth year             195
Number of students who failed the exams                  25
Number of students from the previous year                44
Students who came from other faculties to …..            1
Dissmissed students                                      3
Fourth year students2007-2008
Number of students passed to the fith year               197
Number of students who failed the exams                  18
Number of students from the previous year                20
Students who came from other faculties to …..            0
Dissmissed students                                      0

Fifth year students 2008-2009

Number of students registerd in 2008               218
Number of graduates                                203

Third Cohort

First year students 2003-2004

Students enrolled in the academic year 2003/2004         216
Number of students from the previous year                40
Students who came from other faculties to ….             7
Dissmissed students                                      13
Total                                                    276
Number of students passed to the second year             215
Number of students who failed the exams                  61

Second year students 2004-2005
Number of students passed to the third year              236
Number of students who failed the exams                  48
Number of students from the previous year                61
Students who came from other faculties to …..            1
Dissmissed students                                      7


Third year students 2005-2006

Number of students passed to the fourth year             219
Number of students who failed the exams                  44
Number of students from the previous year                45
Students who came from other faculties to …..            1
Dissmissed students                                      0
Fourth year students2006-2007

Number of students passed to the fith year                             241
Number of students who failed the exams                                20
Number of students from the previous year                              44
Students who came from other faculties to …..                          0
Dissmissed students                                                    2

Fifth year students 2008-2009

Number of students registerd in 2007                             268
Number of graduates                                              243



2.4.2   Students listed by number of years(2005-2010)

Number of accepted students in year1            272

Successful students with accepted level         5(2%)

Successful students with good level             53(26%)

Successful students with very good level        54(27%)
Successful students with excellent level        9(4%)
Passed to the following year                    85(41%)
Pass rate                                       206(76%)
Failure rate                                    66(24%)

Second year students 2006-2007.


Number of accepted students in year2                  242
Successful students with accepted level               6(3%)
Successful students with good level                   49(24%)
Successful students with very good level              67(33%)
Successful students with excellent level              4(2%)
Passed to the following year                          77(38%)
Pass rate                                             230(94%)
Failure rate                                          39(6%)
Third year students 2007-2008.


Number of accepted students in year3       229

Successful students with accepted level    3(1%)

Successful students with good level        23(11%)

Successful students with very good level   42(20%)

Successful students with excellent level   5(2%)

Passed to the following year               141(66%)

Pass rate                                  214(94%)
Failure rate                               15(6%)


Fourth year students 2008-2009.


Number of accepted students in year4       220

Successful students with accepted level    1(1%)

Successful students with good level        29(14%)

Successful students with very good level   83(39%)

Successful students with excellent level   10(5%)

Passed to the following year               85(41%)

Pass rate                                  208(95%)
Failure rate                               12(5%)
Fifth year students 2009-2010.

Number of accepted students in year1       219

Successful students with accepted level    9(4%)

Successful students with good level        84(43%)

Successful students with very good level   99(50%)

Successful students with excellent level   8(3%)

Graduate rate                              200(92%)
Failure rate                               19out of 219(8%)
2.4.3   Graduates (successful preliminary, intermediate and final examinations)

Number of Graduates
Year 2010                                      182
Year 2009                                      203
Year 2008                                      243


2.4.4 Student-teacher ratio 1005/86=11.6
                                              Appendix
           Appendix A: Teaching content of study courses

           Study Year 1 - First Semester       1. Medical Physics
Subject                                   Medical Physics                               Study Year1      Semester 1
Teaching
Staff          Lecturer KRAIM Moussa (theoretical)
               Dr. TAHAN Ahmmed, Dr. SABSABI Adnan, Dr AHMMED Hazarm Ms OBEID Raja (practical).
Hours/week     Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
               Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching
Methods,       Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation and) and practical (Demonstration of lab experiments).
teaching
material,
references
Examination    Practical exam: written assessments with short answers, interview.
(Method,       Theoretical exam: MCQS
Duration)
Learning       Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
Outcomes          1. crystals and their types.
                  2. the mechanism of calcification (mineralization) bone and dental tissues.
                  3. superfacial tension, adhesion mechanism, the application of continuous/alternative current in
                     oral cavity and treatment and erosion and wear.
               Students will be able to
                  1) use some dental and medical devices, and assure health and safety to both practitioners and
                     patients.
                  2) recognise biological side effects of radiation and method of protection of harmful effects of
                     radiation Laser and X-ray devices.
Content         1. Introduction of crystals and mechanisms of mineralization.
                2. Calcification of bone and dental tissues.
                3. Principles of biomechanics.
                4. Forces of surface tension (wet and adhesion).
                5. X-ray ( principles, generation and properties)
                6. X-ray ( devices and usage)
                7. Laser ( principles, generation and properties)
                8. Laser ( devices and usage)
                9. Biology of radiation (effect and prevention)
                10. Sonic and ultrasonic waves (Echography)
                11. Subsonic waves
                12. Electric current (continuous and alternate) and its application
                                       2. Medical chemistry

Subject                Medical chemistry (I)                                  Study Year 1 Semester 1


Teaching Staff         Professor Choukaife Alaa (theoretical)
                       Ms. AL-Akel Iman, Ms Al-Massri Nouha, Ms AL-Hamoui Bayan, Ms
                       Mankach Wafa (practical).

Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly

Teaching Methods,      Theoretical (powerpoint presentation) and practical (Experimental capacity +
teaching material,     scientific report)
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: Experimentation test, written assessments with short answers,
Duration)              and interview.
                       Theoretical exam: MCQS
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                           1- General and Organic Chemistry (Atoms, Interactions and Chemical
                                Bonds, Organic and Inorganic Compounds).
                           2- Basic Biochemistry (Classification and Structure of Proteins,
                                Carbohydrates, Lipids).
                           3- Different Biological States.
                       Students will be able to
                           4- Differente between Organic and Inorganic Compounds.
                           5- Differentiate between species of Enzymes, Carbohydrates, Lipids, and
                                Proteins..
Content                1- Atoms
                       2- Interactions & Chemical Bonds
                       3- Organic & Inorganic Compounds
                       4- Water & Mineral Elements
                       5- Carbohydrates
                       6- Lipids
                       7- Amino Acids
                       8- Proteins
                       9- Enzymes
                       10- Nucleotides & Nucleic Acids
                                          3. Cytology
Subject                                  Cytology                    Study Year1 Semester 1

Teaching Staff       Assistant professor Rim Nadra (Theoretical)
                     Dr. Nahlawi Mohammed (MSc), Ms.Cheichabi Monaz, and Mr.Abou Hamed
                     Barakat, Ms. AL-Assmar Hala, Ms Homssi Nidal (practical).
Hours/week           Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                     Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation, DVDs and animations) and practical
teaching material,   (Microscope observation+ scientific schema).
references           Lectures notes
                     1-Biologie Moléculaire de la cellule. DE Book Universite s.a 1997.
                     2- Molecular Basis of Medical Cell Biology. Gerald M. Fuller and Dennis
                       Sbields. Appleton & Lange A Simon & Schuster Company 2001.
                     3- Biochimie des Communications Cellulaires. YVES COMBARNOUS. Hormones,
                     neuromédiateurs, cytokines et facteurs des croissances, 2ème édition, Lavoisier
                     TEC& DOC 1996.
                     4. La Biologie cellulaire en 1001 QCM et QROC, collection PCEM. Jean-
                     Charles CAILLIEZ. Ellipses Paris, 2003.
                     5. Biologie Moléculaire PCEM1. Simon BEAUMONT.Dunod, Paris, 2007.
                     6. Biologie Cellulaire PCEM1 10ème édition. Marc MAILLET. Elsevier
                     Masson, 2006.
                     7. Cell and Molecular Biology, Concepts and Experiments, Gerald KARP.
                     John Wiley & Sons 2008
Examination (Method, Practical exam: observation microscopic and written assessments with short
Duration)            answers.
                     Theoretical exam: MCQS
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                              1. Some human disorders caused by dysfunction cell structures.
                              2. The concept cell dynamic (cell competence of proliferation
                                 and differentiation).
                              3. The principle of cell interactions and organs leading to the
                                 organism stability.
                     Students will be able to
                             1. Describe the essential cell structures and functions.
Content              Cell characteristics
                      Animal cell and methods of its study: photonic and electronic microscopy
                      Chemical Structure of cell
                      Cellular mouvements and actine- myosine system
                      Molecular architecture and functional components of the cell membrane and its
                     mechanisms of transferring
                      Structure and function of intracellular organelle
                      Nucleus and controls of proteins synthesis
                     Cell communications
                                4. Anatomy of head and neck

subject                               Dental Anatomy                        Study Year 1 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Professor. Yousef Makhloof (theoretical)
                       Dr. Mohammad Yousef (practical part).
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 3 hour weekly
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures
teaching material,     Practically: laboratory; external and internal anatomy of head and neck
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: observing samples and identifiying anatomical landmarks in
Duration)              disection.

                       Theoretical exam: MCQs
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1- cranial nerves, Blood and lymph supply, nerves, muscles, salivary
                              glands,bone, structures and joints.
                       Students will be able to
                          2- identify external and internal anatomical structures of head and neck(
                              Blood and lymph supply, innervations, muscles, salivary glands, bone,
                              sutures and joints)
Content                   1-   Skull and bones.
                          2-   Cranial nerves.
                          3-   Blood and lymph supply.
                          4-   Nerves.
                          5-   Salivary glands.
                          6-   Endocrinology.
                                       5. Dental anatomy

subject                               Dental Anatomy                          Study Year 1 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Professor. Mouhammad Salem Rekab(theoretical)
                       (practical part).
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hour weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures
teaching material,     Practically: laboratory; external and internal anatomy of all teeth.
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: recognizing 10 different types of teeth and numbering them
Duration)              according to international teeth numbering+ tooth drawing (30 minutes).
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                           1. The anatomy of oral cavity and internal and external anatomical
                               structures of primary and permanent teeth.
                           2. The anatomy of root canals in primary and permanent dentition.
                       Students will be able to
                           1. Describe and list external and internal structures of oral cavity.
                           2. Deferntiate between primary and permanent teeth.

Content                   1- Introduction for dental anatomy and nomenclature
                          2- Oral anatomy
                          3- Primary and permanent teeth (names and positions).
                          4- Different notation systems of the teeth (primary and permanent).
                          5- Internal and external structures of permanent teeth including:
                          6- Upper and lower incisors.
                          7- Upper and lower canines.
                          8- Upper and lower premolars.
                          9- Upper molars
                          10- Lower molars.
                          11- Differences between primary and permanent teeth
                          12- Essential differences between primary and permanent teeth and general
                              knowledge of primary teeth.
                                        6. National culture


Subject                              National culture                      Study Year 1 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Therrotically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: Lectures, textbook + lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQS (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                       1-Palestinian case and the Arab conflict.
                       2- The Arabic socialistic "baath" party.
                       3- The development and renewal in the speech of president Bashar Al-Asad.
Content                1- Arabic Islamic civilization.
                       2- The Palestinian case and the Arab conflict.
                       3- The Arabic socialistic "baath" party.
                       4- The correctional movement and the national combat.
                       5- Peace negotiations.
                       6- The national Arabic security.
                       7- The international alterations.
                       8- The development and renewal in the speech of president Bashar Al-Asad.
                                         7. Arabic Language

Subject                               Arabic language                     Study Year 1 Semester 1
Teaching Staff          Therrotically: Dr. Ezdehar Esmandar.
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: Lectures, textbook + lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. The art and science of Arabic language as a life language.
                     Students will be able to
                         2. Apply rules of the grammar in Arabic language.
                         3. Expresse the ideas in a high linguistic level.
                         4. Maintain the firm connection with our national language.
Content              1- Verb-like letters.
                     2- The use of questioning tools.
                     3- The use of swearing tools.
                     4- The use of wondering tools.
                     5- Warning and specialty.
                     6- The use of numbers.
                     7- Conditional verbs.
                     8- Terminologies and dictionaries.
                                           8. Foreign Language

Subject                                New English File                       Study Year 1 Semester 1
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Assistant Professor.Lean Abu Seif.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + English textbook1
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1- General English and grammar (intermediate level).
                         2- some vocabulary and expressions,
                     Students will be able to
                         1- Read and write formal or informal letters,
                         2- Write a film report, and write a letter explaining advantages and
                             disadvantages of a particular issue.
Content              1- Simple and continuous past tenses.
                     2- Future forms.
                     3- Present perfect.
                     4- Present perfect continuous.
                     5- Comparatives and superlatives.
                     6- Model verbs.
                     7- Conditionals.
                     8- Quantifies.
                     9- Gerunds.
                     10- Articles.
                     11- Reported speach.
                     12- Passive/ tags.
                     13- Phrasal verbs.
                     14- All within themes such as: sports, lifestyle, work, food, transportations, etc….
Subject                             French volume 1                        Study Year 1 Semester 1 + 2
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Assistant Professor. Yaser Modalal.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes, French textbook1.
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1- the most used prefixes and suffixes in French.
                        2- Most important terminologies used in French language.
                        3- French dental terminologies.
                     Students will be able to
                  1- Read and understand French articles.
                  2- use French dental terminologies.
Content       1- Racines.
              2- Préfixes.
              3- Suffixes.
              4- Terminologie fondamentale en odonto- stomatologie.
              5- Medicameivts.
              6- Deivtaires.
              7- La tête.
              8- Les dents.
              9- La gencive.
              10- La visite che2 un praticien.


          .
                                       9. Medical Chemistry
Subject                  Medical chemistry(2)                              Study Year 1 Semester 2
Teaching Staff          Professor CHOUKAIFE Alaa (theoretical)
                         Ms. AL-Akel Iman, Ms Al-Massri Nouha, Ms AL-Hamoui Bayan, Ms
                        Mankach Wafa (practical).
Hours/week              Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,       Theoretical (Powerpoint Presentation) and practical (Experimental capacity +
teaching material,      scientific report)
references
Examination (Method, Practical exam: Experimentation test, written assessments with short answers,
Duration)            and interview.
                     Theoretical exam: MCQs
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1. Clinical Biology.
                        2. Clinical Diseases (Atherosclerosis, Hemoglobino pathies,
                             Amyloidosis, Diabetes Mellitus…).
                        3. General Metabolism and Bioenergetics.
                     Students will be able to
                        1. Provide diagnosis of Medical problems.
                        2. Provide diagnosis of metabolic defects and diseases.
Content              Analyse of amino acids & protein misfolding
                     Fibrous proteins
                     Globular proteins
                     Steroids
                     Hormones
                     Vitamins
                     Metabolism & bioenergetic
                     Carbohydrate metabolism
                     Lipid metabolism
                     Nitrogen metabolism
                     Metabolic defects in metabolis
                            10. Biological Statistics and Epidemiology
Subject                          Biostatistics and Epidemiology               Study Year 1 Semester 2

Teaching Staff       Assistant professor ZAINO Mohammad.
Hours/week           Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation and DVDs) White Board
teaching material,   Lectures notes
references           -Biostats, Data-analysis for Dental Health Care professionals By Weintraub,
                     Douglass & Gillings
                     - Biostatistics for Oral Healthcare,
                     Jay S. Kim And Ronald J. Daily
                     -Biostatistics and Epidemiology, A Primer for Health and Biomedical
                     Professionals, Sylvia Wassertheil-Smoller
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs +Essay
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of :
                         1- Basic principles of Epidemiology.
                         2- Basic principles of biostatistics.
                     Students will be able to
                         1- Apply Statistical Methods in Data Analysis
                         2- Utilize statistical methods in future research.
Content                  1-Discriptive Statistics
                            2 Methods of Graphic Presentation in Statistics
                            3 Calculating Probabilities, Probabilities Distribution
                            4 Sampling of Statistical Population
                            5 Estimation
                            6 Parametric and Nonparametric Statistical Hypothesis
                            7 Statistical Analysis of Correlation between 2 Variables
                            8 Analysis of Variance and Experimental Design
                            9 Survival Analysis and Kaplan Meier Curves
                            10 Some Basic Terms and Definitions in Epidemiology
                                       11. Microbiology
Subject                                    Microbiology                   Study Year1 Semester 2

Teaching Staff          Professor BICHARA Hiam (theoretical)
                         Dr. Nahlawi Mohammed (MSc), Nezam Nofoury (MSc), Ms Hamadeh
                        Falaque, Ms Homssi Nidal, Mr.Abou Hamed Barakat (practical).
Hours/week              Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,       Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation) and practical (Microscope observation+
teaching material,      scientific schema)
references
Examination (Method, Practical exam: observation microscopic and written assessments with short
Duration)            answers.
                     Theoretical exam: MCQs
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1- General Microbiology (structure, classification, physiology, genetics,
                        2- Cultivation of bacteria, viruses, parasites, insects and fungi.
                        3- treatment of bacteria, viruses, parasites, insects and fungi.
                        4- Cultural properties.
                        5- Infectious diseases, pathogenesis, immune response, diagnosis,
                             treatment and prophylaxis.
                     Students will be able to
                        1- Preparing Bacterial Smear, Gram Stain, ZN Stain, Kinds of Bacterial
                             Media,
                        2- Cultivate Bacteria.
                        3- Differentiate between of bacterial species based on their morphology.
                        4- Use Microscope and.
                        5- Differentiate between of species of parasites, insects and fungi under
                             microscope.
                        6- Recognise different Immune Responses.
Content                 1- Microbiology- Classification
                         2- Bacterial structure, cultures and physiology.
                         3- Bacterial genetics and Genetic engineering.
                         4- Pathogenesis and Diagnosis of Infectious diseases.
                         5- Antibiotics – Methods of Disinfection & Sterilization.
                         6- Systemic Bacteriology: Gram Positive Cocci, Gram Negative Cocci,
                         Gram Positive Bacilli, Gram Negative Bacilli, Spirochetes,
                         Mycobacterium, Obligate Intracellular Bacteria, Other Bacteria.
                         7- General Virology.
                         8- Special Virology.
                         9- General Parasitology.
                         10- Systemic Parasitology.
                        11- General Mycology.
                         12- Special Mycology.
                         13- Oral Pathogene Cavity and Immune Response.
                                           12. Immunology
Subject                                   Immunology                      Study Year 1 Semester 2

Teaching Staff          Assistant professor Oukla Souad, and Lecturer Kowaider Mahmoud (Theoretical)
                        Mr. Maarouf Numair, Ms. Adawi Iman, Nofoury Nezam (MSc) (practical)
Hours/week              Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,       Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation and DVDs) and practical (lab experiments+
teaching material,      experiments protocols and reports)
references              Lectures notes
                        -Basic Immunology, Abul K.Abbas-Andrew H.Lichtman, 2004
                         -Immunobiology , Charles A Janeway, Paul Travers, Mark Walport, J Donald
                        capra 2005
Examination (Method,
Duration)            Practical exam: written assessments with short answers, interview.
                     Theoretical exam: MCQS
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1- The immune system, its components, and its functions.
                        2- The different types of immunity (natural immunity, cellular immunity and
                             humoral immunity).
                        3- The mechanisms of organs transplantation and the immune mechanism of
                             transplant rejection.
                        4- The basics of autoimmune diseases, different types of hypersensitivity, and
                             congenital or acquired immuno-deficiencies.
                     Students will be able to
                        1- Differentiate between different classes of antibodies and their effects`
                             functions.
                        2- Recognise immune mechanisms against tumors and the potential
                             immunologic approaches for cancer therapy.
Content                 1- Introduction to immunology
                        2- Innate immunity-phagocytosis
                        3- Innate immunity- complement cascade
                        4- Antigens
                        5- T cell receptor /B cell receptors
                        6- Major Histocompatibility complex
                        7- T cell mediated immune response
                        8- B cells mediated immune response
                        9- Immunity against infectious agents:
                        10- Self tolerance
                        11- Mechanisms of autoimmunity
                        12- Hypersensitivity
                        13- Immune response against tumor
                        14- Immunologic mechanisms of transplant rejection
                        15- Congenital immunodeficiencies
                                          13. Foreign language

Subject                                New English File                       Study Year 1 Semester 2
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Assistant Professor.Lean Abu Seif.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + English textbook1
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1- General English, and grammar (intermediate level).
                         2- some Vocabulary and expressions,
                     Students will be able to
                         1- Read and write formal or informal letters,
                         2- Write a film report, and write a letter explaining advantages and
                             disadvantages of a particular issue.
Content              1- Simple and continuous past tenses.
                     2- Future forms.
                     3- Present perfect.
                     4- Present perfect continuous.
                     5- Comparatives and superlatives.
                     6- Model verbs.
                     7- Conditionals.
                     8- Quantifies.
                     9- Gerunds.
                     10- Articles.
                     11- Reported speach.
                     12- Passive/ tags.
                     13- Phrasal verbs.
                     14- All within themes such as: sports, lifestyle, work, food, transportations, etc….
Subject                             French volume 1                        Study Year 1 Semester 2
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Assistant Professor. Yaser Modalal.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes, French textbook1.
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1- The most used prefixes and suffixes in French.
                        2- Most important terminologies used in French language.
                        3- French dental terminologies.
                     Students will be able to
              1- Read and understand French articles.
              2- use French dental terminologies.
Content   1- Racines.
          2- Préfixes.
          3- Suffixes.
          4- Terminologie fondamentale en odonto- stomatologie.
          5- Medicameivts.
          6- Deivtaires.
          7- La tête.
          8- Les dents.
          9- La gencive.
          10- La visite che2 un praticien.
                            14. Behavioral Sciences and Psychology
Subject                       Behavioral Sciences and Psychology      Study Year 1 Semester 2

Teaching Staff    Theoretical: Professor Mouhammad Al-Tinawi
Hours/week        Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching          Theoretical PowerPoint presentation.
Methods, teaching
material,
references
Examination       Theoretical exam: MCQs
(Method,
Duration)
                  Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of :
Learning              1. Behavioral, cognitive, social development of children
Outcomes              2. Methods for behavior management.
                  Students will be able to
                      1. communicate with patients in dental practice
                      2. manage behavior of children, and adults.
                  1- Principles of Psychology
Content           2- Cognitive, behavioral & social growth for individuals.
                  3- Personal communication process and the importance of language.
                  4- Pain, its mechanism, psychology and methods of management
                  5- Management of children with psychological problems.
                  6- Management of children with anxiety & apprehension problems.
                  7- Management of bad oral habits.
                  8- Management of elderly.
                  9- Problems with patients with compliance.
                                      15. General Histology
Subject                             General Histology                         Study Year 1 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theotortically: Asociate Professor. Ahmad Mandili, and Asisstant professor.
                       Sharif Barakat.
                       Practically: Asociate Professor. Ahmad Mandili, Asisstant professor. Sharif
                       Barakat, and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, General Histology (text book).
teaching material,     Practical, recognition of different histological preparations
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: recognizing histological preparations (30 Minutes)
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQS (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1. Histological examination instruments.
                          2. Histological manifestations of body system, organs and tissues.
                       Students will be able to
                          1. Use microscope for histological examination.
                          2. Differentiate between different tissues under microscope.
                          3. Recognise different histological preparations.
Content                   1-   Definition of histology
                          2-   Epithelial tissue
                          3-   Connective tissue (and its special types)
                          4-   Muscular tissue
                          5-   Nervous system
                          6-   Digestive system (and its associated organs)
                          7-   Respiratory system
                          8-   Circulation system
          SECOND YEAR
                                      16. Human Physiology
Subject                                Human Physiology                   Study Year 2 Semester 1

Teaching Staff          Professor Abou Hamed Hussein (Theoretical)
                        Mr. Kaitto Jamil, Mr.Abou Hamed Barakat, Ms. Adawi Iman, Ms Hamadeh
                        Falaque (practical).
Hours/week              Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,       Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation, DVDs and animations) and practical
teaching material,      (Experimental capacity + scientific report)
references
Examination (Method, Practical exam: Experimentation test, written assessments with short answers,
Duration)            and interview.
                     Theoretical exam: MCQs
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1. Principles of physiology.
                        2. The functions of different body systems, and regulation of their
                             function in Humans.
                        3. The external/internal environment of humans.
                     Students will be able to
                        1. Recognise signs and symptoms of diseases.
                        2. Undertake important basic investigations.
                        3. Apply basic knowledge of physiology into professional practice
                             (prevention, diagnosis, intervention and prognosis).
Content              Introduction to human physiology
                     Chemical composition of the body
                     Excitable tissues
                     Autonomic nervous system
                     Heart & circulation
                     Blood ,Immune system, & Lymphatic system
                     Physiology of Respiratory System
                     Physiology of Gastro-Intestinal system:
                     Physiology of kidneys
                     Endocrine glands: Secretion & action of hormones
                     Nervous system (neurons, synapses, neurotransmitters & receptors)
                     Central nervous system
                     Physiology of Sense
                     Physiology of Reproduction
                                      17. Dental Materials
Subject                                                                      Study Year 2 Semester1
Teaching Staff         Asociate Professor Arwa Khir, Asociate professor Rola Albouni, Asisstant
                       professor Oula Yassin, and Assistant professor Souad Abboud (theoretical part)
                       Asisstant professor asociate professor (practical part), and postgraduate
                       students.+Bushra Habib
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 6 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, practical.
teaching material,     Restorative dental material (text book)+ lectures' notes.
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: interviews
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1. Physical, biological and chemical properties of preventive and
                               restorative dental materials.
                       Students will be able to
                          1- Handle and apply dental materials.
                          2- Select the proper instruments for application.
                          3- Select the proper materials for each preparation
                          4- Identify indications and contraindications of dental materials.
                          5- Demonstrate adherence to health and safety procedures.
Content                    Definition of operative dentistry
                             Stages of cavtiy preparation
                             Instruments used in operative dentistry
                             Class I cavities (restorations)
                             Class II (restorations)
                             Class III ( restorations)
                             Class IV (restorations)
                             Class V (restorations)
                             Class VI (restorations)
                             Biological considerations.
                             18. Genetics and Embryology
Subject                 Molecular Embryology and Genetics                Study Year 2 Semester 2

Teaching Staff          Assistant professor Rim Nadra (Theoretical)
Hours/week              Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation, DVDs and animations)
teaching material,   Lectures notes
references           1-Biologie Moléculaire de la cellule. DE Book Universite s.a 1997.
                     2- Biology of life on Earth. Treesa Audesirk and Gerald Audesirk.
                     University of Colorado at Denver; 1999 by Prentice-Hall, Inc. upper
                     Saddle River, New Jersey.
                     3- Génétique Médicale. Lynn B. Jorde, John C. Carey, Micheal J.
                     Bamshad and Raymond L. White. 2004 ELSEVIER USA.
                     6- Embryologie Humaine. William J. Larsen. De Boeck &Larcier s.a. 2004.
                     7- Langman`s. Medical Embryology. T.W. Sadler 9th Edition, 2004.
                     8- La Dent Normale et Pathologique. Etienne PIETTE et Micheal GOLBER ,
                     DE Boeck & Larcier s.a., 2001
                     9- Cell Biology. Thomas D. Pollard and William C.Earnshay. SAUNDERS.
                     2004
                     10- Human Biology. Sylvia S.MADER MC Graw-Hill U.S.A, 2004
                     11- Cell and Molecular Biology, Concepts and Experiments. Gerald Karp.
                     John Wiley&Sons, Inc.2008
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. Early stages of embryo development from the first week until fourth
                             week in relation to development of Cranio-facial complex and teeth.
                         2. The terminology of genetic cranio-facial diseases which might be seen
                             in the clinics.
                         3- some bio-molecular techniques used for genetic analysis of
                             craniofacial genetic disorders
                     Students will be able to
                         1. List patternes of inheritance.
                         2. Identify cranio-facial diseases which might be seen in dental clinics.
                     Desoxyribonuleic Acid (DNA): Heredity molecule
Content              The continuty of Life
                     The patterns of Inheritence
                     Developmental cranio-facial human genes
                     Technical molecular biology
                     Early embryo development
                     Development cranio-facial deformities.
                                      19. Fixed Prosthodontics(1)
Subject                               Fixed Prosthodontics 1                Study Year 2 Semester 1
Teaching Staff          Therrotically:Professor. Omar alAdel, Professor.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza
                        Allaf A.Prof. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabil AlHouri, A.Prof.
                        Loay Morad,A.Prof.M.Faisal AL SBEE.
                        Practically :Professor. Omar alAdel, Professor.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza
                        Allaf A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof.
                        Loay Morad,A.Prof.Mfaisal AL SBEE + postgraduate students.
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly

                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly in lab.
Teaching Methods,       Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes + Review in Fixed
teaching material,      Prosthodontics (reference book: Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics ; Rosenstiel
references              et al. 2006- Fundamentals of fixed prosthodontics ; shillingburg et al.1997)

                     Practically: full crown preparations on phantoms.
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
                     Practical exam: preparation on Phantoms.
Learning Outcomes       Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                           1.   Principles of fixed prosthodontics, indications and contraindications.
                           2.   Types of resotrations, preparations.
                           3.   Steps for different prepartions.
                           4.   Stages of fabrications.

                        Students will be able to

                           1. List indications and contraindications for different preparations, and
                              different types of restorations.
                           2. Take impressions and apply temporary restorations.
                           3. Prepare crowns for anterior and posterior teeth in the lab.

Content                    1. Overview of the science of Fixed Prosthodontics.
                           2. Indication and contraindication of crowns & bridges .
                           3. Full crown ( anterior and posterior).
                           4. Preparation steps and clinical procedure including impression and
                              temporary.
                           5. Preparation steps procedure including impression, temporary, and
                              labortory fabrication for simple three unite bridge.
                               20. Diseases of Eye, Ear, Nose and throat
Subject                          Diseases of Ear, Nose & Throat          Study Year 3 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Therrotically: Professor. Mouhammad Nobough Alaawa.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQS (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                           1. the anatomy of ear, nose and throat
                           2. the physiology of the Ear, nose and throat.
                           3. problems of ear, nose and throat in relation to dentistry.
                       Students will be able to
                           1. Describe the anatomical and physiological structure of ear, nose and throat.
                           2. List signs and symptoms of ear, nose and throat generally and in relation to
                           dentistry.
Content                1. Anatomy of ear.
                       2. Otitis.
                       3. Otalgia.
                       4. Vertigo and tinnitus.
                       5. Facial nerve palsy.
                       6. Anatomy of nose.
                       7. Epistaxis, nose injuries, and trauma of the nose.
                       8. Rhinitis, sinusitis.
                       9. Tonsils and vegetation.
                       10. Larynx anatomy.
                       11. Laryngitis.
                       12. Larynx tumors.
                       13. Salivary gland diseases.
                                  21. Foreign language(English/French)

Subject                                New English File                     Study Year 2 Semester 1
Teaching Staff           Theortically: Assistant Professor.Lean Abu Seif.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + English textbook1
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. General English and grammar (intermediate level).
                         2. some Vocabulary and expressions,
                     Students will be able to
                         1. Read and write formal or informal letters,
                         2. Write a film report, and write a letter explaining advantages and disadvantages
                             of a particular issue.
Content              1- Simple and continuous past tenses.
                     2- Future forms.
                     3- Present perfect.
                     4- Present perfect continuous.
                     5- Comparatives and superlatives.
                     6- Model verbs.
                     7- Conditionals.
                     8- Quantifies.
                     9- Gerunds.
                     10- Articles.
                     11- Reported speach.
                     12- Passive/ tags.
                     13- Phrasal verbs.
                     14- All within themes such as: sports, lifestyle, work, food, transportations, etc….

Subject                                   French volume 2                   Study Year 2 Semester 1
Teaching Staff           Theoretical: Assistant Professor. Yaser Modalal.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes, French textbook1.
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1. the most important medical and dental terminologies.
                     Students will be able to
                        2. Read, understand, and translate French articles in a scientific analytical
                            approach.
Content   1. La carie dentaire.
          2. Les gingivites.
          3. Les parodontolyses.
          4. La couronne.
          5. La prosthèse fixe.
          6. La prosthèse amovible.
          7. Orthodontie.
          8. Les extractions et leurssvites.
          9. Curetage peri-apicale.
          10. Implants et greffes.
          11. Les dents de vos enfants.
          12. Les malpositions dentaires.
                                            22. Ophthalmology

Subject                                    Ophthalmology                   Study Year 3 Semester 1
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Professor..Yusra Hedde
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. The anatomy and physiology of eye
                         2. Problems of eye in relation to dentistry.
                     Students will be able to
                         1. Describe the anatomical and physiological structure of eye.
                         2. List signs and symptoms of eye generally and in relation to dentistry.
Content              1. Applied anatomy (eyeball, the orbit, extraocular muscles, eyelid, lacrimal
                     apparatus, vessels and verves of the orbit).
                     2. Applied physiology.
                     3. Clinical reflection.
                     4. Errors of reflection (hypermetropia, myopia, astigmatism, presboyopia).
                     5. Contact lenses.
                     6. Congenital abnormalities of eyelids.
                     7. Eyelid diseases
                     8. Eyelid tumors
                     9. Lacrimal apparatus diseases.
                     10. Disorders of the lacrimal drainage system.
                     11. The conjunctiva, bacterial,viral, fungal and allergic conjunctivitis.
                     12. Conjunctival degenerations.
                     13. Tumors of the conjunctiva.
                     14. Congenital abnormalities of the cornea.
                     15. The keratitis.
                     16. The sclera.
                     17. The uvea.
                     18. The lens, cataract.
                     19. Glaucoma.
                     20. Vitreous body.
                     21. Retina.
                     22. The orbit and orbit diseases
                     23. Strabismus (concomitant and paralytic strabismus).
                     24. Ocular pain correlated with sinusitis and pulpitis
       Second Year semester 2
                                        22. Oral Histology

Subject                                   Oral Histology                  Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theorotically:Asociate Professor. Ahmad Mandili, and Asisstant professor.
                       Sharif Barakat
                       Practically: Asociate Professor. Ahmad Mandili, Asisstant professor. Sharif
                       Barakat, and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, Oral Histology (text book).
teaching material,     Practical, recognition of different histological preparations
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: recognizing histological preparations (30 Minutes)
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                           1. oral cavity basic microscopic structure
                           2. tooth histological structures
                           3. salivary glands histological structures
                           4. lips, palates, checks, tongue and paranasal sinuses histological
                              structures.
                       Students will be able to
                          1. Use microscope for oral and dental histological examination.
                          2. Differentiate between different oral and dental tissues under
                              microscope.
Content                    1-   Oral cavity in emberyonic develompnt
                           2-   Enamel, dentin, cementum and pulp
                           3-   Soft and hard palate
                           4-   Salivary glands
                           5-   Tongue, gigiva, checks histollgcally
                           6-   Paranasal sinuses.
                                   23. Operative Dentistry (1)

Subject                               Operative Dentistry 1                Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Asociate Professor Arwa Khir, Asociate professor Rola Albouni, Asisstant
                       professor Oula Yassin, and Assistant professor Souad Abboud (theoretical part)
                       Asociate professor Arwa Khir (practical part), and postgraduate
                       students.+Bushra Habib
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, practical.
teaching material,     Operative dentistry- cavity preparation (text book).
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: cavity preparation on acrylic and extracted teeth. 45 mins
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1. Principles, stages and steps of cavity preparation (class I, II, III, IV, V).
                          2. Biological considerations for cavity preparations.
                       Students will be able to
                          1. Prepare class I, II, III, IV and V cavities.
Content                   1. Definition of operative dentistry
                          2. Stages of cavtiy preparation
                          3. Instruments used in operative dentistry
                          4. Class I cavities (restorations)
                          5. Class II (restorations)
                          6. Class III ( restorations)
                          7. Class IV (restorations)
                          8. Class V (restorations)
                          9- Class VI (restorations)
                          10- Biological considerations.
                                 24. Removable prosthodontics (1)
Subject                             Removable prosthodontics 1             Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff          Theorotical: Professor. Gassan Wazir, Professor.Eyad Alshaarani, and Asociate
                        professor. Muhannad Alsaadi.
                        Practical: Asociate professor. Muhannad Alsaadi, Dr. Garid Hennawi, and
                        postgraduate students.
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes.
teaching material,   Practical: Lab work of clinical relevance (performing all laboratory stages of
references           removable construction except denture curing; including designing, and
                     waxing metal framework)
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)            Practical exam: arranging (setting) complete set of teeth.
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1. basic principles of partial and complete dentures, anatomical landmarks
                             and physiology of edentate mouth
                        2. Basic principles of the laboratory procedures of the fabrication of
                             removable denture.
                     Students will be able to
                        1. Record primary and final impressions.
                        2. Identify the relationship of the jaws (occlusal vertical dimension, and
                               registration of centric relationship).
                            3. Record jaw relationships, check occlusion.
                            4. Follow clinical and laboratory technical stages of denture fabrication.
Content (English)           1- Introduction to partial and complete dentures, anatomical landmarks
                               and physiology of edentate mouth.
                            2- Recording primary and final impressions.
                            3- Establishing the relationship of the jaws (occlusal vertical dimension,
                               and registration of centric relationship).
                            4- Recording jaw relationships, checking occlusion and
                            5- Technical stages of denture fabrication.
                            6- Clinical and laboratory stages of removable denture.
                                          25. Oral Physiology

Subject                                  Oral Physiology                   Study Year 2 Semester 2

Teaching Staff           Professor Abou Hamed Hussein (Theoretical)

Hours/week               Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly

Teaching Methods,    Theoretical PowerPoint presentation, DVDs and animations.
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs
Duration)
                     Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
Learning Outcomes        1. the main functions of masticatory system and sensory receptors in Oro-
                            facial region and their regulating role.
                         2. the main function of cranio-facial complex (growth, bone, orthodontic
                            movement, TMJ).
                         3. the main function of dental complex (PD, dentinal pulpal complex).
                         4. the movement of circulatory chock and syncope
                     Students will be able to
                         1. Recognize signs and symptoms of shock and syncope,
                         2. Apply scientific knowledge (masticatory system and sensory receptors,
                            cranio-facial complex, dentinal pulpal complex) in daily dental practice.
                     Oral environment
Content              Functional dental-organ
                     Physiology of Masticatory System (Mastication, swallowing, speech)
                     Oro-facial Sensation (Pain, Touch, Pressure).
                     Physiology of Periodontal ligament
                     Pulp-Dentin-Complex
                     Physiology TMJ
                     Physiology of Local and General Anaesthesia
                     Histophysiological Response to Orthodontic Movement
                     Physiology of Bone.
                     Growth of Cranio-facial Complex
                     Autonomic Neurological system and Stress.
                     Circulatory shock and Syncope.
                                  Internal Medicine and Dermatology

                                        26. a Internal Medicine

Subject                                26-a Internal Medicine            Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff          Theoretically: Professor. Hasan Abboud.
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. Principles of patient approach, clinical examination, and taking history.
                         2. Principles of medical treatment (antibiotics, nonsteroid anti-inflammatory
                             drugs).
                         3. Principles of approaching to clinical laboratory tests.
                     Students will be able to
                         1. Evaluate vital signs and main symptoms of systemic disorders, and principles
                             of clinical approach.
                         2. Manage emergency cases.
Content              1. Definition of medicine diseases, history, and clinical examination.
                     2. Vital signs, approaching structural symptoms.
                     3. Symptoms of nervous system – meningitis – convulsions.
                     4. Symptoms of cardiovascular and respiratory systems.
                     5. Symptoms and common clinical manifestation of gastrointrology system.
                     6. Liver hepatitis
                     7. Symptoms of urogenital system - glandular/endocrine system.
                     8. Septic diseases and sexually transmitted diseases.
                     9. Approach to the patient in shock and treatments.
                     10. Treatment with antibiotics and nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory. .
                     11. Emergencies in medicine.
                                           26.b Dermatology

Subject                                     Dermatology                 Study Year 3 Semester 1
Teaching Staff          Therrotically: Professor.M.Yousef
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQS (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. Principles of dermal diseases, bacterial, viral, genetic, bullous and
                             autoimmune diseases that can affect skin and oral mucosa.
                     Students will be able to
                         2. recognize dermal diseases that affect oral mucous membrane and skinn.
Content              1. Basics in dermal diseases.
                     2. Bacterial diseases.
                     3. Viral diseases.
                     4. Genetic diseases.
                     5. Bullous diseases.
                     6. Autoimmune diseases.
                     7. Tumors.
                               27. Minor surgery and surgical diseases
                                       27. a surgical diseases

Subject                                27. a Minor Surgery                  Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal.
                       Practical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri, Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate
                       prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit,
                       Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel
                       Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah + Dr. Mohammad
                       Almekdad, Dr. Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Minor general surgery textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical: Minor general surgery.
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1- Anatomy of human anatomy especially head and neck.
                          2- General patient care.
                          3- Causes of septic diseases.
                          4- Using different types of injections.
                          5- Treatment of wounds burns and fractures.
                          6- Emergency care.
                       Students will be able to
                          1- Provide emergency care.
Content                   1.   Patient examination and admission to hospital.
                          2.   Vital signs.
                          3.   Surgical infection and antibiotics.
                          4.   Essential surgical instruments.
                          5.   Sterilization and antisepsis.
                          6. General patient care.
                          7. Drugs administration via injection, and puncture.
                          8. Catheterization and electrocardiography.
                          9. Emergency care.
                          10. Bleeding and management of blood transfer.
                          11. Wounds and managements.
                          12. Burns, bone fractures and managements.
                                       27. b. Surgical Diseases
Subject                              27. b. Surgical diseases               Study Year2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Associate professor. Yaser Mdalal.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Oral and maxillofacial surgery textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical: Oral and maxillofacial surgery.
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1. Diagnosis and treatment of acute abdominal pain.
                          2. Surgical treatment of some diseases of different systems in the body.
                          3. Laparoscopic surgery.
Content                   1.   Acute abdominal pain.
                          2.   Thrombophlebitis/ hemorrhoids.
                          3.   Pulmonary embolism.
                          4.   Hepatic surgery.
                          5.   Pancreatic surgery.
                          6.   Appendix vermiformis lesions.
                          7.   Peptic ulcer.
                          8. Splenic surgery.
                          9. Renal surgery.
                          10. Thyroid and parathyroid surgery.
                          11. Mammal surgery.
                          12. Laparoscopic surgery.
                                  28. Foreign language(English/French)

Subject                                New English File                      Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Assistant Professor.Lean Abu Seif.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + English textbook1
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                         1. General English and grammar (intermediate level).
                         2. Some Vocabulary and expressions,
                     Students will be able to
                         1. Read and write formal or informal letters,
                         2. Write a film report, and write a letter explaining advantages and disadvantages
                             of a particular issue.
Content              1- Simple and continuous past tenses.
                     2- Future forms.
                     3- Present perfect.
                     4- Present perfect continuous.
                     5- Comparatives and superlatives.
                     6- Model verbs.
                     7- Conditionals.
                     8- Quantifies.
                     9- Gerunds.
                     10- Articles.
                     11- Reported speach.
                     12- Passive/ tags.
                     13- Phrasal verbs.
                     14- All within themes such as: sports, lifestyle, work, food, transportations, etc….
Subject                                 French volume 2                    Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff       Theoretical: Assistant Professor. Yaser Modalal.
Hours/week           Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes, French textbook1.
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                        1. The most used prefixes and suffixes in French.
                        2. Most important terminologies used in French language.
                        3. French dental terminologies.
                     Students will be able to
                        1. Read, understand, and translate French articles.
              2. Use French dental terminologies articles in a scientific analytical approach.
Content   1. La carie dentaire.
          2. Les gingivites.
          3. Les parodontolyses.
          4. La couronne.
          5. La prosthèse fixe.
          6. La prosthèse amovible.
          7. Orthodontie.
          8. Les extractions et leurssvites.
          9. Curetage peri-apicale.
          10. Implants et greffes.
          11. Les dents de vos enfants.
          12. Les malpositions dentaires.
          Third Year 5th semester
                                              29. Radiology
Subject                                        Radiology                      Study Year 2 Semester 2
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant Professor. Eyad
                         Haffar.
                         Practically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant Professor. Eyad
                         Haffar, Asisstant Professor. Easter Joury, Dr. Abeer Sharabi and postgraduate
                         students.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                         Practical hours: 3 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,        Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes
teaching material,       Practically: Laboratory (reading different types of radiography).
references
Examination (Method,      Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)                Practical exam: X-rays reading + interview.
Learning Outcomes        Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                             1. Principles of radiology.
                             2. Principles of infection control and radiation protection.
                             3. Films, types, indications, techniques, methods, chemical processing.
                         Students will be able to
                             1. Use radiographic equipments and Take x-rays and interpret findings.
                             2. Recognize radiographic characteristics of normal landmarks and identify
                                 abnormal findings.
                             3. Compare radiographic findings with clinical conditions.
                             4. Apply health and safety principles related to radiation protection.
Content                  1. X-rays History.
                         2. X-rays physics.
                         3. X-rays properties.
                         4. X-rays Biology.
                         5. Films used in X-rays.
                         6. Chemical processing of films.
                         7. Infection control and the radiographic technician.
                         8. Methods of intraoral radiography.
                         9. Anatomy – intraoral films.
                         10. Mistakes in radiography and techniques.
                         11. Methods of extraoral radiography.
                         12. Panoramic radiography.
                         13. Digital radiography.
                         14. Radiographic diagnosis of dental caries.
                         15. Abnormal manifestations of periapical diseases.
                         16. Manifestations of trauma and periapical lesions.
                         17. Identification of restorative and dental materials and foreign bodies.
                         18. Use of Tomography and other techniques.
                                      30. General Pathology
Subject                              General Pathology                        Study Year 3 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theoretically: Asociate Professor Ahmad Mandili, and Asisstant professor Nabil
                       Kochaji.
                       Practically: Asociate Professor Ahmad Mandili, Asisstant professor Nabil
                       Kochaji, and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 3 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, General Pathology (text book).
teaching material,     Practical, recognition of different pathological preparations
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: recognizing pathological preparations (30 Minutes)
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                          1. Principles of pathology and pathological changes related to degeneration,
                               infection, inflammation, pigmentation, infarction and necrosis and
                               neoplastia.
                       Students will be able to
                          2. Recognize pathological changes under microscope and compare between
                               normal and abnormal tissues.
Content                   1-   Definition of pathology
                          2-   Cellular degeneration
                          3-   Inflammation and infection
                          4-   Hematological disorders
                          5-   Pigmentation disorders
                          6-   Infarction and necrosis
                          7-   Neoplasm’s principles
                          8-   Carcinomas & sarcomas
                                     31. Operative Dentistry
Subject                               Operative Dentistry 2                Study Year 3 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Asociate Professor Arwa Khir, Asociate professor Rola Albouni, (theoretical
                       part)
                       Asociate professor Arwa Khir (practical part), and postgraduate
                       students.+Bushra Habib
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, practical.
teaching material,     Operative dentistry (text book).
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: cavity preparation and restoration on acrylic and extracted
Duration)              teeth. 45 mins
                       Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                          1. Principles of isolation and moisture control.
                          2. Properties of bases and luting materials.
                          3. Properties of amalgam and esthtetic resotrations

                       Students will be able to
                          1. Use and apply luting and restorative materials after preparing the tooth
                              in the lab.
Content                   1. History of operative dentistry
                          2. Considerations affecting operative dentistry
                          3. Moisture and saliva control
                          4. Liners and bases
                          5. Dental amalgam restorations
                          6. Compound amalgam restorations.
                          7. Bonding systems(1)
                          8. Composite
                          9. Glass ionomer cement (1)
                          10. Compomer as a restorative material (1)
                          11. Cast – Gold restorations
                          12. Clinical cases.
                        32. Public Health, Preventive and Community Dentistry
Subject                        Public health, preventive dentistry &          Study Year 3 Semester 1
                                        community dentistry
Teaching Staff           Therotically: Professor. Mouhammad Tinawi, Asociate professor. Ammar
                         Mashlah.
                         Practically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant professor. Eyad
                         Haffar, Asisstant professor. Easter Joury, Dr. Abeer Sharabi, and postgraduate
                         students.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                         Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook (Dental public health, preventive
teaching material,   dentistry, and community dentistry) + lectures' notes.
references           Practically: applying preventive dentistry to patients + visits to outpatients health
                     centers.
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)            Practical exam: discussing clinical cases on PowerPoint + interview
Learning Outcomes    Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                              1. The concept of dental public health.
                              2. The concept of health promotion.
                              3. The principles of epidemiology.
                          Students will be able to
                              1. Recognise factors affecting dental public health.
                              2. Apply aspects of preventive dentistry.
                              3. Assess the risk for dental caries and periodontal disease.
                              4. Use preventive measures to prevent oral diseases and conditions.
Content                   1. Public health- an overview.
                          2. Oral health education and health promotion.
                          3. Missing teeth.
                          4. Dental Caries.
                          5. Periodontal diseases.
                          6. Fluorosis.
                          7. Oral cancer and other lesions.
                          8. Caries assssment
                          9. Periodontal diseases assessment.
                          10. Fluoride- dental health and caries prevention.
                          11. Water fluoridation.
                          12. Fissures and pits sealant.
                          13. Prevention of Periodontal disease.
                          14. Tobacco use cessation.
                          15. Nutrition and oral health care.
                          16. Impact of epidemiology on dental practice.
                          17. Oral health and geriatric medicine.
                          18. Dental diseases and oral health status.
                          19. Dental public health (introduction).
                                       33. Periodontology 1
Subject                                  Periodontology 1                 Study Year 3 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theorotically:Professor. Razan Khattab, Professor.Usama Ebrahim,Prof. Sharif
                       Alashkar, A. Prof. Rwaida Saimeh. A.pro. Suliman Dayoub, A.prof. Monzer
                       Sabbagh, A.prof. Ali Abu Suliman, A.Prof. Tarek Shwaiki
                       Practically: Professor.Usama Ebrahim,A. Prof. Rwaida Saimeh. A.pro.
                       Suliman Dayoub, A.prof. Monzer Sabbagh, A.prof. Ali Abu Suliman, A.Prof.
                       Tarek Shwaiki+postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures textbook + lectures' notes + Review in
teaching material,     Periodontology (reference book)
references             Practical: periodontal diagnostics and treatments in the lab.
Examination (Method,    Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: interviews+ diagnosis and instrument recognition on pictures
                       and cases shown on PowerPoint or video
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                          1. The periodontium.
                          2. Periodontal disease, classification, epidemiology, diagnosis and
                              assessment, prevention and treatment.
                          3. The link between periodontal disease and systemic diseases.
                       Students will be able to
                          1. Classify the types of periodontal disease.
                          2. Assess the health of periodontal tissue and recognize abnormalities.
                          3. Recognize the difference between periodontal instruments and identify
                              the indication for each instrument.
                          4. Apply preventive measures and plaque control procedures.
Content                   1- The gingiva.
                          2- The tooth supporting structure.
                          3- Classification of periodontal disease.
                          4- Epidemiology of periodontal diseases.
                          5- Periodontal pocket and bone patterns.
                          6- Clinical diagnosis.
                          7- The plan and phases of periodontal therapy.
                          8- Periodontal instrument.
                          9- Scaling and root planning.
                          10- Plaque control.
                          11- Management of medically compromised patients (1).
                          12- Management of medically compromised patients (2).
          Third Year 6nd semester
                                         34. Pharmacology

Subject                                    Pharmacology                      Study Year 3 Semester 2

Teaching Staff           Professor Mourade Rachad (Theoretical)
                         Dr. DAASS Abdoul-Hakim (MSc), Mr. Kaitto Jamil, Mr. Abou-Hamed
                         Barakat (practical)

Hours/week               Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                         Practical hours: 2 hours weekly

Teaching Methods,        Theoretical (PowerPoint presentation) and practical (Demonstration lab
teaching material,       experiments)
references
Examination (Method,     Practical exam: written assessments with short answers, interview.
Duration)                Theoretical exam: MCQs
Learning Outcomes        Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                             1. Basics of pharmacology, modes of actions, Pharmaco-dynamics,
                                recommended drugs, adverse and drugs interaction.
                             2. The role of mediations in maintaining the healthy state.
                             3. Dental medications, their pharmacokinetics and side effects of drugs.
                         Students will be able to
                             1. Classify medications used in dentisty into groups.
                             2. Select the proper medications for each medical/dental case.
                             3. Assess the risk of medications used in dentistry.
                             4. Recognize adverse effects of medications used in dentistry.
                             5. Prescribe proper medications for preventing or controlling dental and
                                oral diseases.
                             6. Use emergency medications.
Content                     1. Introduction to pharmacology: (part I)
                            2. Introduction to pharmacology: (part II)
                            3. Prescription
                            4. Principles of antimicrobial treatment (antibiotics): (part I)
                            5. Principles of antimicrobial treatment (part II)
                            6. Antifungal and antiviral medication
                            7. Opioid analgesics & management of pain
                            8. Non steroidal anti inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs)
                            9. Corticosteroids
                            10. Homeostasis
                            11. General & local anesthesia
                            12. Drugs of autonomic nervous system. Histamine & antihistamines
                            13. Medication use for the dental caries and peridental diseases
                            14. Drugs for medical emergencies
                            15. Antiseptics & disinfectants.
                                        35. Oral Pathology
Subject                                   Oral Pathology                 Study Year 3 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theoretically: Asociate Professor Ahmad Mandili, and Asisstant professor
                       Nabil Kochaji
                       Practically: Asociate Professor Ahmad Mandili, Asisstant professor Nabil
                       Kochaji, and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 3 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 3 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical, Oral pathology (text book).
teaching material,     Practical, recognition of different pathological preparations
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: recognizing pathological preparations (30 Minutes)
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of

                          1. oral pathological conditions(ie: cysts, tumors,) under microscope
                       Students will be able to
                          2. Recognize the pathological changes of salivary glands and neoplastic
                              lesions under microscope.
                          3. Differntiate between benign and malignant lesions under microscope.
Content                   1- Dental caries
                          2- Pulp diseases and periapical lesions
                          3- Jaws cyst
                          4- Odontogenic tumours
                          5- Salivary glands diseases and tumours
                          6- Oral white lesions and pre-malignant lesions
                          7- Oral carcinoma
                          8- Soft tissue tumours and tumour like lesions
                          9- Lymphomas in the oral cavities
                          10- Metastasis from and to the oral cavity
                                     36. Pediatric Dentistry (1)
Subject                               Pediatric Dentistry(1)                  Study Year 3 Semester 2

Teaching Staff           Practical: Associate professor: Basheer Al-Munakel, Associate professor:
                         Muhanad Lafloof, Associate professor: Shaza Koushaji, Assistant professor:
                         Nada Bishara. Assistant professor Itehad Abu- Arraj
                         Dr. Shadi Azaawii, Khalia Baleesh(PhD Holder).
Hours/week               Practical: 2 hours weekly

Teaching Methods,    Practical: labaratory work(10 cases)
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Practical exam: practical exam, preparing acrelic tooth (operative, pulpotomy,
Duration)            RCT).
                     Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
Learning Outcomes
                        1. Anatomy of primary teeth.
                        2. Principles of preventive, operative and endodontic procedures in
                             primary dentition.

                         Students will be able to
                             1. Apply preventive procedures for primary teeth.
                             2. Prepare dental caries and its consequences in primary dentition ( lab).
                         1. Eruption, development in Pediatric dentistry.
Content                  2. Diagnosis and assessment in Pediatric dentistry.
                         3. Prevention in pediatric dentistry.
                         4. Cavity preparation in primary teeth.
                         5. Operative and endodontic treatment in children.
                                     37. Fixed Prosthodontics (2).
Subject                               Fixed Prosthodontics 2               Study Year 3 Semester 2
Teaching Staff          Therrotically:Professor. Omar alAdel, Professor.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza
                        Allaf A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof.
                        Loay Morad,A.Prof.M.Faisal AL SBEE.
                        Practically :Professor. Omar alAdel, Professor.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza
                        Allaf A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof.
                        Loay Morad,A.Prof.Mfaisal AL SBEE + postgraduate students.
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly in lab
Teaching Methods,       Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes + Review in
teaching material,      Fixed Prosthodontics (reference book: Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics ;
references              Rosenstiel et al. 2006- Fundamentals of fixed prosthodontics ; shillingburg et
                        al.1997)

                        Practically: Bridge preparation, Partial retainers preprations , post& cores
                        preparation on phantoms and extracted tooth for post &core .
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)            Practical exam: preparation on Phantoms.
Learning Outcomes    Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                        1. Partial Retainers, cementation of different types of bridges, and different
                             restorative solutions and prosthetic materials.
                     Students will be able to:
                            2. Prepare short span bridge.
                            3. Restore extensively damaged teeth (Post and Core).
Content                     1. Types of bridges.
                            2. Restoration of extensively damaged teeth (Post and Core).
                            3. Indication and contraindication of crowns & bridges .
                            4. Partial retainers (anterior and posterior), preparation steps and clinical
                            procedure including impression& temporary.
                             5. Short span bridge . Preparation steps and clinical procedure including
                            impression making, interim restoration and laboratory procedures.
                                       38. Science of Occlusion
Subject                                 Science of Occlusion                    Study Year 3 Semester 2
Teaching Staff               Theoretical: Prof.Mouhamad Yousef, Prof. Nasser Sawan, Asociate prof.
                             Ayham Kaddah, and Assist prof. Imad Kaaid.
                             Practical: Prof. Mouhamad Yousef, Prof. Nasser Sawan, Asociate prof. Ayham
                             Kaddah, Assist prof. Imad Kaaid, Assist prof. Mehieldin Alrashi, Assist prof,
                             Lwai Mahaini, Assist prof, Rania Haddad, Assist prof, Mwafak Ajaj, Assist
                             prof. Chadi Bredi, Assist prof. Yazan Jahjah
Hours/week                   Theoretical hours: 2 hours
                             Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods, teaching   Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures. lectures' notes
material, references         Practical: clinical on patients + lab work on dental casts+ a case study
Examination (Method,         Practical exam: OPCE + interviews
Duration)                    Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Learning Outcomes            Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                                 1. The development of temporomandibular joint and occlusion
                                 2. Static and motility occlusion.
                                 3. Radiographic and magnetic resonance diagnosis
                                 4. Correlation between occlosuion and other dental specialties
                                 5. Occlusion reconstruction (selective teeth grinding, prosthodontic
                                     replacements, orthodontic treatment, and orthognathic surgery.
                                 6. Classification of articulators
                             Students will be able to:
                                 1. Recognize the mechanism of masticating system as an integrated
                                     functional unit (anatomy, function and movement).
                                 2. Diagnose temporomandibular joint disorders, investigate their causes,
                                     and correlate between casues and malocclosuion.
                                 3. Treat patients using occlusal splint therapy (when needed).
Content                         1.  Development of temporomandibular joint and the occlusion.
                                2.  Masticatory system as a vital system.
                                3.  Mandibular's movements and positions.
                                4.  Occlusal surfaces of the teeth, and static occlusion.
                                5.  Normal occlusive intercuspation – motility occlusion.
                                6.  Diagnosis and treatment of temporomandibular joint disorders-
                                    differential diagnosis (Manuel functional analysis – Axel Bumann).
                                7. Articulators and dental casts mounting.
                                8. Occlusal analysis in adults and restoring the occlusion.
                                9. Occlusal contacts.
                                10. Occlusal alterations and normal occlusal relationships.
                                11. Interrelation between occlusion and other dental specialties.
                                     39. Infection control
Subject                              Infection Control                       Study Year 3 Semester 2

Teaching Staff         Professor. Razan Khattab and Professor.Usama Ebrahim
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours delivered in English and Frensh
Teaching Methods,      PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes (this subject is taught in English &
teaching material,     French).
references             Principles of infection control textbook + lectures' notes
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. West management, occupational hazards,                besides    emergency
                              procedures.
                          2. Infection control regulations in dental college.
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Apply the principles of infection control in dental clinics.
                          2. Use personal protective equipments
                          3. Recognize different methods of instruments sterilization &surface and
                              equipments asepsis.
                          4. Employ aseptic techniques
                          5. Demonstrate adherence to health and safety procedures.
Content (English)             1. The importance & rationale of infection control in dentistry.
                              2. Microbiology and infection control.
                              3. Diseases of concern to the dental team – blood-borne diseases (viral
                                  hepatitis, HIV Disease...) – air-borne diseases (tuberculosis,…) –
                                  water-borne diseases (legionnaires disease, …)
                              4. Personal protective equipment.
                              5. Instrument processing.
                              6. Instrument sterilization (1): dry heat sterilization
                              7. Instrument sterilization (2): Steam sterilization, indicators.
                              8. Surface &equipment asepsis (surface barriers + chemical
                                  disinfectants)
                              9. Aseptic techniques (disposable, handhygien, engineering an work
                                  practice control, immunization, and medical history).
                              10. Waste management (housekeeping, ex.teeth, laundary).
                              11. Dental unit water asepsis.
                              12. Laboratory & radiographic asepsis.
                      13. Occupational hazards (management of the office safety program/
                          labels/ OSAP/ information & training/ chemicals safety/ mercury/
                          radiation).
                      14. Office emergency procedures, fire and emergency action plan.
                      15. Infection control regulations in dental college, Damascus
                          University.
Content (French)
                   1- Importance du control infectieux en odontologie.
                   2- Les microorganismes impliques en control infectieux en odontologie
                   3- les maladies infectieuses dans le cabine dentaire porte par :
                       - le voila sanguin (Hépatite, HIV etc)
                       - l´ air (tuberculoses, )
                        - L´eau (Légionnaires,…..)
                   4- Protection personale
                   5- Décontamination des instruments
                   6- Stérilisation des instruments (1) : stérilisation par la chaleur sèche
                   7- Stérilisation des instruments (2) : stérilisation par le vapeur, indices de
                       la stérilisation.
                   8- Nettoyage        de sol et de surface et d’unit : les antiseptiques, Les
                       désinfectants chimiques
                   9- Des infection du matériel : les instrument neufs, matériel à usage
                       unique, matériel réutilisable, lavage de mains / vaccin, histoire médical
                   10- Elimination de déchet ,le soigne à domicile, élimination de dents
                       extraites extraction. le nettoyage
                   11- Décontamination de l´eau dans l´unité dentaire
                   12- Désinfections de laboratoire dentaire et en radiologie
                   13- Risque professionnel : étiquettes/ OSAP -information, stage / la
                       sécurité chimique / Mercure / Radiation
                   14- Instruction de control du risque infectieux dans la faculté de chirurgie
                      dentaire – université de Damas
          Fourth Year, 7st Semester
                                             40. Oral Diseases (1)

Subject                                      Oral Diseases(1)                 Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff            Therrotically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant professor. Eyad
                          Haffar.
                          Practically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant professor. Eyad
                          Haffar, Asisstant professor. Easter Joury and Dr. Abeer Sharabi+ postgraduate
                          students.
Hours/week                Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly
                          Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,         Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes +
teaching material,        Practically: clinical diagnostic of oral diseases cases on patients.
references
Examination (Method,       Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)                 Practical exam: discussing clinical cases on PowerPoint + interview.
Learning Outcomes         Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                              1. Obtaining medical and dental history
                              2. Imprtance of vitamins and minerals intake, and fluoride application and
                                  intake.
                          Students will be able to:
                              1. Apply principles of cross-infection management.
                              2. Apply different methods of clinical, radiological and laboratory patient
                                  examination.
                              3. Differentiate diagnosis of oral diseases.
                              4. Recognize dental development disorders, gingival and periodontal
                                  diseases, oral cavity cysts and other lesions.
Content                   1. Introduction.
                          2. Obtaining medical and dental history.
                          3. Examination techniques.
                          4. Clinical examination of the head and the neck.
                          5. Principles of cross-infection management.
                          6. Dental developmental disorders.
                          7. Pulpitis.
                          8. Gingival and periodontal diseases.
                          9. Bad breath.
                          10. Vitamins and minerals.
                          11. Fluoride.
                          12. Oral cavity cysts.
                          13. White and red lesions.
                                       41. Operative Dentistry (3)
Subject                                Operative Dentistry 3                 Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff        Asociate professor Rola Albouni, Asisstant professor Oula Yassin, and Assistant
                     professor Souad Abboud (theoretical part)
                     Asociate professor Rola Albouni, Asisstant professor Oula Yassin, and Assistant
                     professor Souad Abboud,Assistant professor Mazen Dayoub and postgraduate
                     students(practical part).
Hours/week           Lectures hours: 1 hour weekly
                     Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical, practical.
teaching material,   Operative dentistry (text book) and lectures' notes.
references
Examination          Practical exam: cavity preparation and restoration on patients. 30 mins
(Method, Duration)   Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning             Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
Outcomes                1. Methods of clinical tooth preparation (class I,II, III, IV, and V )
                        2. Clinical application of amalgam on posterior teeth.
                        3. Clinical application of composite and other tooth- colored restorations on
                             anterior teeth.
                        4. Different bonding systems.
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. Assess, and examine patients to diagnose caries and other tooth defects, and
                           plan treatments.
                        2. Select the proper instruments for application, and the proper material for
                           restoration
                        3. Perform amalgam, anterior composite, posterior composite restorations.
Content                 1. Patient assessment and principles of clinical work practice.
                        2. Caries diagnosis, treatment planning and prognosis.
                        3. Instruments and materials used in clinical practice.
                        4. Class I and II ( Amalgam restorations).
                        5. Composite and tooth colored restorations,
                        6. Anterior composite restorations.
                        7. Posterior composite restorations.
                        8. Bonding systems (2)
                        9. Glass inomer cement (2)
                        10. Compomers (2)
                        11. Failure in composite restorations and its treatment.
                                     42. Endodontics (1)
Subject                                  Endodontics I                 Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Professor. Faisal Dayoub, Professor. Mouhammad Salem Rekab,Asociate
                       professor Hisham Afif, and Asociate professor Kinda Layous(theoretical)
                       Asociate professor Hisham Afif, and Asociate professor Kinda Layous and
                       postgraduate students (practical part).
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hour weekly
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical and practical
teaching material,     Endodontics textbook
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: endodontic treatment on extracted teeth
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQS (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Normal development of dental pulp & periradicular tissues
                          2. internal anatomy of teeth
                          3. Techniques of obturation
                          4. Several surgical endodontical procedures.
                          5. Complications of endodontics
                          6. Endodotic symptoms and treatment planning
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Use different endodontic instruments, and perform procedures of
                               isolation, irrigants, and intercanal medicaments (lab work)
                          2. Perform different root canal treatments (lab work).
                          3. Recognize etiology of periradicular
Content                   1. Introduction of endodontics and its relation with other sciences, and
                              maintenance of pulp vitality.
                          2. Embryology of dental pulp and periradicular tissues
                          3. Diagnosis and treatment planning.
                          4. Pulp and periradicular etiology
                          5. Isolation in endodontics.
                          6. Access opening and pulp extirpation.
                          7. Length determination and endodontic instruments.
                          8. Cleaning and shaping of root canal system
                          9. Irriggants and intracanal medicaments.
                          10. Non vital different methods and techniques of obturation.
                          11. Treatment of nonvital pulps and apical lesions.
                          12. Endodontic complications.
                          13. Endodontic surgery.
                                         43.Periodontology(2)

Subject                                  Periodontology 2                 Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Therrotically:Professor. Razan Khattab, Professor.Usama Ebrahim,Prof. Sharif
                       Alashkar, A. Prof. Rwaida Saimeh. A.Pro. Suliman Dayoub, A.Prof. Monzer
                       Sabbagh, A.Prof. Ali Abu Suliman, A.Prof. Tarek Shwaiki
                       Practically: Professor.Usama Ebrahim,A. Prof. Rwaida Saimeh. A.Prof. Suliman
                       Dayoub, A.Prof. Monzer Sabbagh, A.prof. Ali Abu Suliman, A.Prof. Tarek
                       Shwaiki+postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes + Review in
teaching material,     Periodontology (reference book)
references             Practically: Clinical periodontology treatments (on patients)
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: interviews+ clinical diagnosis and planning an accordingly
                       appropriate treatment for cases shown on PowerPoint or video
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                           1. Occlusal and medical therapy.
                           2. Etiology of periodontal diseases
                           3. Gingivectomy and flap performing procedures
                       Students will be able to:
                           1. Apply preventive measures.
                           2. Treat simple cases of periodontal disease (gingivitis, periodonitis).
                           3. Manage different types of non-surgical periodontal treatemts
                           4. Recognize the interrelationship between periodontal and systematic
                               diseases
Content                   1-   Dental plaque and calculus
                          2-   Microbiology of Periodontal diseases
                          3-   Host modulation and genetic factors.
                          4-   Systemic diseases risk factors, smoking , stress, diabetes…..
                          5-   Impact of periodontal infection on systemic health.
                          6- Gingival diseases.
                          7- Periodontal diseases.
                          8- Non-surgical periodontal therapy supported by chemotherapeutic agents.
                          9- Furcation involvement.
                          10- Principles of periodontal surgery of treatment of perio emergencies.
                          11- Periodontal surgery.
                               44. Removable Prosthodontics(2)

Subject                            Removable prosthodontics 2             Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Professor. Gassan Wazir, Professor.Eyad Alshaarani, and
                       Assistant professor. Ammar Moustafa.
                       Practical: Asociate professor. Muhannad Alsaadi, and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + Complete Dentures textbook
teaching material,     Practical: Clinically on patients (1 removable acrylic denture + 1 removable
references             metal denture)
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: laboratory work (30 minutes).
Learning Outcomes      Students will be able to:
                          1. Design removable partial or complete denture
                          2. Apply the principles and clinical procedures to construct a removable
                               denture.
                          3. Follow the clinical steps from diagnosis to the delivery of a partial or
                               complete denture.
                          4. Solve problems that follow insertion of removable/complete denture.
Content (English)         1- Introduction to complete dentures.
                          2- Recording primary and final impressions.
                          3- Aspects of designing a removable denture.
                          4- Practical steps of making removable denture.
                          5- Clinical steps of removable partial denture construction.
                          6- Clinical steps of complete denture (diagnosis, preliminary impression,
                             final impression, bite registration, clinical try in, delivery).
                          7- Post insertion problems.
                                   45. Anesthesia and Extraction (1)

Subject                              Anesthesia and Extraction(1)           Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Professor. Abdalla Tlimat, Professor. Eisa Wahba, Professor. Munir
                       Harfoush, Professor. Haitham Bahah, Asociate professor. Issam khouri , Associate
                       professor. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate professor. Safwan Jaber, Asociate professor. Mazen
                       Zenati, Assistant professor. Zavin Garabit, Assistant professor. Khaldoon Darwish,
                       Assistant professor. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant professor. Basel Brad, Assistant professor.
                       Ali Jbara, Assistant professor. Samer Kasabah.
                       Practical: Professor. Abdalla Tlimat, Professor. Eisa Wahba, Professor. Munir
                       Harfoush, Professor. Haitham Bahah, Asociate professor. Issam khouri , Associate
                       professor. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate professor. Safwan Jaber, Asociate professor. Mazen
                       Zenati, Assistant professor. Zavin Garabit, Assistant professor. Khaldoon Darwish,
                       Assistant professor. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant professor. Basel Brad, Assistant professor.
                       Ali Jbara, Assistant professor. Samer Kasabah + Dr. Mohammad Almekdad, Dr.
                       Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Anesthesia textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical: Clinical on patients.
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Anatomical structures of oral cavity and its nerves.
                          2. Properties of different local anesthetics and vasoconstrictors.
                       Students will be able to:
                          3. Recognize pain physiology and treatment.
                          4. Identify properties of different local anesthetics and vasoconstrictors.
                          5. Define best methods of local and regional anesthetics, and their complications.
Content                       1. Anatomy of oral cavity.
                              2. Nerves of oral cavity.
                              3. Pain.
                              4. Local anesthetic drugs.
                              5. Vasoconstrictors.
                              6. Kinds of regional anesthesia.
                              7. Extraoral anesthesia.
                              8. Electrical anesthesia.
                              9. Local complications of anesthesia.
                              10. General complications of anesthesia.
                            46. Orthodontics and dentofacial orthopedics (1)
Subject                        Orthodontics& Dentofacial Orthopedics 1        Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff            Theoretical: Prof.Mouhamad Yousef, Prof. Nasser Sawan, Asociate prof. Ayham
                          Kaddah, and Assistant prof. Imad Kaaid.
                          Practical: Prof. Mouhamad Yousef, Prof. Nasser Sawan, Asociate prof. Ayham
                          Kaddah, Assistant prof. Imad Kaaid, Assistant prof. Mehieldin Alrashi, Assistant
                          prof, Lwai Mahaini, Assistatn prof, Rania Haddad, Assistant prof, Mwafak Ajaj,
                          Assistant prof. Chadi Bredi, Assistant prof. Yazan Jahjah+ postgraduate students.
Hours/week                Theoretical hours: 4 hours weekly
                          Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods, teaching Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures. Orthodontics textbook + lectures' notes
material, references       Practical: lab work on dental casts+ a case study.
Examination (Method,      Practical exam: wire bending on a dental cast (30 minutes)
Duration)                 Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Learning Outcomes         Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                              1. Classification of malocclusion and dentofacial deformities.
                              2. Principles of orthodontic treatment.
                              3. Principles of orthodontic appliances, componenets and their types.
                              4. Relation between orthodontics and other specialties.
                          Students will be able to:
                            1. Use different diagnostic and assessment methods in orthodontics.
                            2. Apply preventive procedures in orthodontics.
                            3. Differentiate between different types of malocclusion and dentofacial
                               deformities.
                            4. Recognize different types and indications of orthodontic appliances.
                            5. Define the best time for orthodontic treatment for orthodontic problems.
Content                           1. Principles of orthodontic diagnosis.
                                  2. Clinical examination and functional examination.
                                  3. Studying casts.
                                  4. Radiographic and cephalometric examination.
                                  5. Photographs analysis.
                                  6. Classification of malocclusion and dentofacial deformities.
                                  7. Principles of orthodontic appliances and their types.
                                  8. Removable active appliances.
                                  9. Functional appliances.
                                  10. Fixed active appliances.
                                  11. Prevention and early orthodontic treatment.
                                  12. Orthodontic treatment in mixed dentition.
                                  13. Orthodontic treatment in adult dentition.
                                  14. Treatment planning in orthodontic treatment.
          Fourth Year 8nd semester
                                            47. Oral Diseases(2)

Subject                                     Oral Diseases(2)                    Study Year 4 Semester 2

Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant professor. Eyad
                         Haffar.
                         Practically: Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah, Asisstant professor. Eyad
                         Haffar, Asisstant professor. Easter Joury and Dr. Abeer Sharabi+ postgraduate
                         students.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly
                         Practical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,        Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes +
teaching material,       Practically: clinical diagnostic of oral diseases cases on patients.
references
Examination (Method,      Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)                Practical exam: discussing clinical cases on PowerPoint + interview.
Learning Outcomes        Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of
                             1. Oral lesions, tongue, salivary diseases and joint disorders.
                             2. Dental infections.
                             3. Orofacial diseases.
                         Students will be able to:
                             1. List oral, tongue diseases and joint disorders.
                             2. Recognise signs and symptoms of oral diseases.
                             3. Prscibe medications for different oral diseases.
                             4. Recognize oral manifestations of systemic diseases.
Content                  1. Oral lesions.
                         2. Salivary gland lesions.
                         3. Tongue diseases.
                         4. Oral manifestations of AIDS.
                         5. Maxillary sinus diseases.
                         6. Temporomandibular joint disorders.
                         7. Complicated infections of dental origin.
                         8. Facial and nervous diseases.
                         9. Bell’s palsy.
                         10. Torus mandibularis and palatinus.
                         11. LASER applications in oral medicine.
                         12. Forensic dentistry.
                                        48. Endodontics(2)
Subject                                  Endodontics I+II                 Study Year 4 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Professor. Faisal Dayoub, Professor. Mouhammad Salem Rekab,Asociate
                       professor Hisham Afif, and Asociate professor Kinda Layous(theoretical)
                       Asociate professor Hisham Afif, and Asociate professor Kinda Layous and
                       postgraduate students (practical part).
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 1 hour weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical and practical
teaching material,     Endodontics textbook
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: endodontic treatment on extracted teeth
Duration)              Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Several surgical endodontical procedures and their complications.
                          2. Symptoms of vital, and nonvital pulps, and apical lesions in
                               endodontics, and treatment planning.
                          3. Techniques of obturation
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Recognize internal anatomy of teeth and development of dental pulp,
                               and periradicular tissues
                          2. Perform different root canal treatments and procedures of isolation,
                               irrigations, and applications of intercanal medicaments (lab work).
Content                       1. Introduction of endodontics and its relation with other sciences, and
                                 maintenance of pulp vitality.
                              2. Embryology of dental pulp and periradicular tissues
                              3. Diagnosis and treatment planning.
                              4. Pulp and periradicular etiology
                              5. Isolation in endodontics.
                              6. Access opening and pulp extirpation.
                              7. Length determination and endodontic instruments.
                              8. Cleaning and shaping of root canal system (hand and rotary
                                  instrumentation).
                              9. Irriggants and intracanal medicaments.
                              10. Non vital different methods and techniques of obturation.
                              11. Treatment of nonvital pulps and apical lesions.
                              12. Endodontic complications.
                              13. Endodontic surgery.
                                   49. Peadiatric Dentistry(2)
Subject                            Paediatric Dentistry(2)             Study Year 4 Semester 2

Teaching Staff         Theoretical: Professor Mouhammad Al-Tinawi, Associate professor: Basheer
                       Al-Munakel, Associate professor: Muhanad Lafloof, Associate professor:
                       Shaza Koushaji, Assistant professor: Nada Bishara, Assistant professor:
                       Mayssoon Dashash. Assistant professor Itehad Abu- Arraj
                       Practical: Dr. Shadi Azaawii, Khalia Baleesh(PhD Holder).
Hours/week             Lectures hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical PowerPoint presentation.
teaching material,     Practical: clinical cases (10 cases)
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs
Duration)            Practical exam: treatment of a complete case
                     Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
Learning Outcomes           1. Normal development, eruption and development of craniofacial
                                disorders
                            2. Sedation and general anesthesia.
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. Develop scientific and theoretical knowledge in pediatric dentistry.
                        2. Manage effectively behaviors of normal children and of those with
                             systematic diseases and with special needs.
                        3. Treat emergency cases in pediatric dentistry.
                        4. Diagnose gingival and periodontal diseases in children.
                        5. Apply procedures of preventive, operative, and endodontic treatments
                             in children
                        6. Solve problems in pediatric dentistry or refer.
                        1. Diagnosis and assessment in pediatric dentistry.
Content                 2. Behavior management in children.
                        3. Eruption, developmental and craniofacial disorders.
                        4. Preventive orthodontics in children.
                        5. Anesthesia.
                        6. Cavity preparation in primary teeth.
                        7. Operative and endodontic treatment in children.
                        8. Prevention in pediatric dentistry.
                        9. Traumatic injuries in children.
                        10. Gingival and periodontal diseases in children.
                        11. Sedation and general anesthesia.
                        12. Management of children with special needs.
                        13. Management of children with systematic diseases.
                                  50. Removable Prosthodontics (3)

Subject                         Removable complete prosthodontics            Study Year 4 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Professor. Gassan Wazir, Professor.Eyad Alshaarani, and Asociate
                       professor. Alaa Saloum.
                       Practical: Professor. Gassan Wazir, Assistant professor. Ammar Moustafa, and
                       postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + Complete Dentures &
teaching material,     Maxillofacial prosthodontics textbook
references             Practical: Clinically on patients (upper and lower complete dentures)
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: laboratory work (30 minutes).
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Maxillofacial prosthodontics,
                          2. Management of elderly patients, patients with maxillofacial deformities,
                               and flabby ridge
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Apply the clinical steps of removable complete denture construction.
                          2. Design a complete denture
                          3. Treat problems related to dentures.
                          4. Apply complete dentures placed over implants, overdentures, and soft
                               liner.
Content (English)         1-   Immediate complete dentures.
                          2-   Maxillofacial prosthodontics.
                          3-   Overdentures.
                          4-   Implants in conjunction with complete dentures.
                          5-   Treating abuse tissues.
                          6-   Treatment of compromised patients (elderly, maxillofacial deformity,
                               and flabby ridge)
                          7- Treating problems associated with denture use.
                          8- Single complete denture.
                          9- Use of soft lining materials.
                                      51. Fixed Prosthodontics (3)
Subject                                Fixed Prosthodontics 3                Study Year 4 Semester 1
Teaching Staff          Therrotically:Professor. Omar alAdel, Professor.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza
                        Allaf A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof.
                        Loay Morad,A.Prof.M.Faisal AL SBEE.
                         Practically :Professor. Omar alAdel, Professor.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza
                        Allaf A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof.
                        Loay Morad,A.Prof.M Faisal AL SBEE + postgraduate students..
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly – in clinics
Teaching Methods,       Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes + Fixed
teaching material,      Prosthodontics (reference book: Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics ; Rosenstiel
references              et al. 2006- Fundamentals of fixed prosthodontics ; shillingburg et al.1997).

                     Practically: Clinical fixed Prosthetic treatments (on patients).
Examination (Method, Practical exam: tooth preparation on patients
Duration)            interviews+ clinical diagnosis and planning an accordingly appropriate treatment
Learning Outcomes    Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                        1. Fixed prosthodontics.
                        2. Temporomandibular disorders.
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. Plan treatment for edentulous space.
                        2. Manage edentulos space replacement.
                        3. Recognize the relation between fixed prosthodontics and periodontal
                             tissue, and removable prostheses .
                        4. Apply principles of color matching between teeth and fixed prosthodontics
Content                  Diagnosis in Fixed Prosthodontics.
                         Treatment planning for partially edentulous patients.
                         Try-in stage and color science.
                         Pontics.
                         Implant prosthesis option.
                         Temporomandibular disorders.
                                       52. Anesthesia and Extraction(2)
Subject                                   Teeth extraction                     Study Year 4 Semester 2
Teaching Staff       Theorotical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                     Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri, Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate
                     prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit, Assistant
                     prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel Brad,
                     Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah.
                     Practical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof. Haitham
                     Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri , Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate prof. Safwan
                     Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit, Assistant prof.
                     Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel Brad, Assistant
                     prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah + Dr. Mohammad Almekdad, Dr.
                     Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week           Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
                     Practical hours: 4 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical: Anesthesia textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,   Practical: Clinical on patients.
references
Examination          Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
(Method, Duration)   Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning             Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
Outcomes                1. Best methods of non surgical and surgical extraction.
                        2. Systemic diseases and their impact on teeth extraction.
                        3. Extraction of impacted molars, and canines.
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. List indications and contraindications of extraction and surgical extractions.
                        2. Apply basic principles of teeth extraction.
                        3. Prepare patients for surgical procedures.
                        4. Recognize different applications of the most used armamentarium in teeth
                            extraction.
                        5. Provide instructions postoperatively.
                        6. Manage post extraction complications.
Content                     1.   Principles of tooth extraction.
                            2.   Armamentarium used for teeth extraction.
                            3.   Systemic diseases and extraction.
                            4.   Surgical extraction and extraction of impacted molars.
                            5.   Extraction of impacted canines.
                            6.   Post extraction care.
                            7.   Post extraction complications.
       Fifth year 9st semester
                                       53. Endodontics(3)

Subject                                    Endodontics(3)                 Study Year 5 Semester 1
Teaching Staff          Professor. Safouh Albouni, Asociate professorMouhamad Usama Aljabban,
                        Asisstant professorHasan Ashour, A.Prof Taher Aja, and A.Prof Mohamad
                        Tayan (practical part).
Hours/week              Theortical: 1 hours.
                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,       Practical on patients
teaching material,      Endodontics textbook
references
Examination (Method,    Practical exam: endodontic treatment on patients
Duration)               Besides interviews
Learning Outcomes       Students will be able to:
                           1. Apply scientific knowledge of endodontics in clinical practice.
                           2. Plan endodontic treatment.
                           3. Apply different methods of isolations (rubber dam).
                           4. Apply different methods of disinfection and sterilization.
                           5. Select best irrigants, instruments, techniques and materials for irrigation
                                and obturation.
                           6. Perform different methods of cleaning, shaping, obturation, and
                                condensation for root canal system in vital teeth.
Content                     1. Diagnosis and treatment planning.
                            2. Rubber dam placement.
                            3. Root canal treatment on vital upper molars.
                            4. Root canal treatment on vital lower molars.
                            5. Root canal treatment on vital upper premolars.
                            6. Root canal treatment on vital lower premolars.
                            7. Root canal treatment on vital upper incisors
                            8. Root canal treatment on vital lower incisors.
                            9. Performing two cases or more using crown down technique.
                            10. Performing two cases or more using warm vertical condensation.
                                            54. Implantology
Subject                                    Implantology                      Study Year 5 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri, Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate
                       prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit,
                       Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel
                       Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah.
                       Practical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri , Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal,
                       Asociate prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin
                       Garabit, Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant
                       prof. Basel Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah + Dr.
                       Mohammad Almekdad, Dr. Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly.
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Anesthesia textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical: Clinical on patients.
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. The basic requirements involved in all phases of implant therapy.
                          2. The surgical techniques and healing time required for implants.
                          3. The concept of osseointegration.
                          4. The basic fixed and removable prosthodontic techniques for implants.
                          5. The importance of seeking further courses in implant dentistry for
                               more expertise and for familiarity with other implant systems.
                          6. The relationship between dental implants and other dental specialities.
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Provide diagnoses and plan treatment.
                          2. Develop an understanding of implant-host relations and interactions.
                          3. Include implants in overall diagnosis and plan treatments for patients.
                          4. Recognize the limitations of implants by illustrating implant failure,
                               soft tissue problems, prosthodontic (mechanical) complications, and
                               the need for recall of implant patients.
                          5. Select proper site for implant.
                          6. Follow the rapidly expanding research in dental implants, which
                               directly affects current treatment modalities.
                          7. Identify different implant components by means of a short preclinical
                               laboratory.
                          8. Treat an implant patient.
                          9. Identify the level of difficulty of implant treatment which might
                               indicate a referral.
              10. Manage implants' complications.
Content   Historical overview of dental implantology
          Concept of osseointegration
          Classification and types of dental implants
          Implant biomechanics/biomaterials
          Implant surface treatment
          Anatomy and/or histology of the hard and soft tissue/implant interface
          Implant patient education
          Dental presurgical assessment of the implant patient
          Medical presurgical assessment of the analysis of the implant patient
          Radiographic/image evaluation and analysis of the implant patient
          Treatment planning for an implant-supported fixed partial denature
          Treatment planning for an implant-retained overdenture
          Treatment planning for partially edentulous cases
          Treatment planning for fully edentulous cases
          Treatment planning for the single tooth implant restoration
          Screw-retained cemented implant restoration
          Occlusion on implant restorations
          Craniofacial applications of implants
          Implant site selection
          Implant stage 1 and 2 surgical procedure
          Implant postsurgical care
          Adjunct surgical techniques for implant therapy (soft and hard tissue augmentation,
          sinus elevation techniques)
          Implant surgical complications and management
          Implant prosthetic complications and management
          Current research and developments in implantology
                                    55. Peadiatric Dentistry
Subject                             Paediatric Dentistry(3)             Study Year 5 Semester 1

Teaching Staff          Theoretical: Professor Mouhammad Al-Tinawi, Associate professor: Basheer
                        Al-Munakel, Associate professor: Muhanad Lafloof, Associate professor:
                        Shaza Koushaji, Assistant professor: Nada Bishara, Assistant professor:
                        Mayssoon Dashash, Assistant professor Itehad Abu- Arraj
                        Practical: Dr. Shadi Azaawii, Khalia Baleesh(PhD Holder).
Hours/week              Lectures hours: 1 hours weekly
                        Practical:4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,       Practical: clinical cases (10 cases)
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs
Duration)            Practical exam: treatment of a complete case
                     Students will be able to:
Learning Outcomes       1. Develop scientific and theoretical knowledge in pediatric dentistry.
                        2. Manage effectively behaviors of normal children
                        3. Treat emergency cases in pediatric dentistry.
                        4. Diagnose gingival and periodontal diseases in children
                        5. Apply procedures of preventive, operative, and endodontic treatments
                             in children
                        6. Solve problems in pediatric dentistry or refer.
Content                      1. Diagnosis and assessment in pediatric dentistry.
                             2. Behavior management in children.
                             3. Eruption, developmental and craniofacial disorders.
                             4. Preventive orthodontics in children.
                             5. Anesthesia.
                             6. Cavity preparation in primary teeth.
                             7. Operative and endodontic treatment in children.
                             8. Prevention in pediatric dentistry.
                             9. Traumatic injuries in children.
                             10. Gingival and periodontal diseases in children.
                             11. Sedation and general anesthesia.
                             12. Management of children with special needs.
                             13. Management of children with systematic diseases.
                                  56. Removable Prosthodontics (4)
Subject                         Removable complete prosthodontics            Study Year 5 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Professor. Gassan Wazir, Professor.Eyad Alshaarani, and Asociate
                       professor. Alaa Saloum.
                       Practical: Professor. Gassan Wazir, Assistant professor. Ammar Moustafa, and
                       postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes + Complete Dentures &
teaching material,     Maxillofacial prosthodontics textbook
references             Practical: Clinically on patients (upper and lower complete dentures)
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: laboratory work (30 minutes).
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Maxillofacial prosthodontics.
                          2. Management of elderly patients, and patients with maxillofacial
                               deformities, and flabby ridge.
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Follow clinical steps of removable complete denture construction.
                          2. Design complete denture.
                          3. Treat problems related to dentures use.
                          4. Apply complete dentures placed over implants, overdentures, and soft
                               liner.
Content (English)         1- Immediate complete dentures.
                          2- Maxillofacial prosthodontics.
                          3- Overdentures.
                          4- Implants in conjunction with complete dentures.
                          5- Treating abused tissues.
                          6- Treatment of compromised patients (elderly, maxillofacial deformity,
                             and flabby ridge)
                          7- Treating problems associated with denture use.
                          8- Single complete denture.
                          9- Use of soft lining materials.
                                       57. Fixed Prosthodontics(4)
Subject                                Fixed Prosthodontics 4                Study Year 5 Semester 1
Teaching Staff          Therrotically:Prof. Omar alAdel, Prof.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza Allaf
                        A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.prof. Eiad Sweed, A.prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof. Loay
                        Morad,A.Prof.M.Faisal AL SBEE.
                         Practically :Prof. Omar alAdel, Prof.Fandi al Sharany, A. Prof. Merza Allaf
                        A.Prof.. Jehad abonasar, A.Prof. Eiad Sweed, A.Prof. Nabel Horee, A.Prof. Loay
                        Morad,A.Prof.M Faisal AL SBEE + postgraduate students..
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly – in clinics
Teaching Methods,       Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes + Fixed
teaching material,      Prosthodontics (reference book: Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics ; Rosenstiel
references              et al. 2006- Fundamentals of fixed prosthodontics ; shillingburg et al.1997).

                     Practically: Clinical fixed Prosthetic treatments (on patients)
Examination (Method, Practical exam: tooth preparation on patients
Duration)            interviews+ clinical diagnosis and planning an accordingly appropriate treatment
Learning Outcomes    Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                        1. Fixed prosthodontics in conjuction with implants
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. List indications and contra indications of fixed prosthodontics and
                             different types of crowns and bridges.
                        2. replace missing teeth and follow clinical steps of applying crowns and
                             bridges.
                        3. Apply principles of color matching between natural teeth and restorations.
Content                 1. Diagnosis in Fixed Prosthodontics.
                        2. Treatment plan for partially edentulous patients.
                        3. Try-in stage and color science.
                        4. Pontics.
                        5. Implant prosthesis option
                        6. Relation between fixed prosthodontics and other dental disciplines.
                                   58. Anesthesia and Extraction (3)
Subject                                   Teeth extraction                   Study Year 5 Semester 1
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri , Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal,
                       Asociate prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin
                       Garabit, Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant
                       prof. Basel Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah.
                       Practical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri , Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal,
                       Asociate prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin
                       Garabit, Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant
                       prof. Basel Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant professor. Samer Kasabah + Dr.
                       Mohammad Almekdad, Dr. Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Anesthesia textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical: Clinical on patients.
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Best methods of non surgical and surgical extraction.
                          2. General diseases and their impact on teeth extraction.
                          3. Extraction of impacted molars, and canines.
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Apply basic principles of teeth extraction.
                          2. Prepare patients for surgical procedures.
                          3. Recognize different application of the most used armamentarium in teeth
                              extraction.
                          4. Manage post extraction complications.
                          5. Instruct patients with proper recommendation for post extraction care.
                          6. Apply basic principles of teeth extraction.
Content                          Principles of tooth extraction.
                                 Armamentarium used in teeth extraction.
                                 Systemic diseases and extraction.
                                 Surgical extraction.
                                 Extraction of impacted molars and canines.
                                 Post extraction care.
                                 Post extraction complications.
                                       59. Operative Dentistry(4)
Subject                                Operative Dentistry 4                 Study Year 5 Semester 1
Teaching Staff       Asociate prof Rola Albouni, Asisstant prof Oula Yassin, and Assistant prof Souad
                     Abboud (theoretical part)
                     Asociate prof Rola Albouni, Asisstant prof Oula Yassin, and Assistant prof Souad
                     Abboud,Assistant prof Mazen Dayoub and postgraduate students(practical part).
Hours/week           Lectures hours: 1 hour weekly
                     Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretical, practical.
teaching material,   Operative dentistry (text book) and lectures' notes.
references
Examination          Practical exam: cavity preparation and restoration on patients. 30 mins
(Method, Duration)   Theoretical exam: MCQs (1 hour)
Learning             Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
Outcomes                1. Methods of clinical tooth preparation (class I,II, III, IV, and V )
                        2. Clinical application of amalgam on posterior teeth.
                        3. Clinical application of composite and other tooth- colored restorations on
                             anterior teeth.
                        4. Different bonding systems.
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. Assess, and examine patients to diagnose caries and other tooth defects, and
                             plan treatments.
                        2. Select the proper instruments for application, and the proper material for
                             restoration
                        3. Perform anterior composite, and posterior composite and amalgam,
                             restorations.
Content                     1. Patient assessment and principles of clinical work practice.
                            2. Caries diagnosis, treatment planning and prognosis.
                            3. Instruments and materials used in clinical practice.
                            4. Class I and II ( Amalgam restorations).
                            5. Composite and tooth colored restorations,
                            6. Anterior composite restorations.
                            7. Posterior composite restorations.
                            8. Bonding systems (2)
                            9. Glass inomer cement (2)
                            10. Compomers (2)
                            11. Failure in composite restorations and its treatment.
                                         60. Endodontics (4)
Subject                                    Endodontics(4)               Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Prof. Safouh Albouni, Asociate prof.Mouhamad Usama Aljabban, Asisstant
                       professorHasan Ashour, A.Prof Taher Aja, and A.Prof Mohamad Tayan
                       (practical part).
Hours/week             Theortical: 1 hour weekly.
                       Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,      Practical on patients
teaching material,     Endodontics textbook
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: endodontic treatment on patients
Duration)              Besides interviews
Learning Outcomes      Students will be able to:
                          1. Perform different methods of cleaning and shaping of root canal system
                               in non-vital teeth.
                          2. Perform different techniques for obturation and condensation.
Content                   3. Performing different methods of cleaning and shaping of root canal
                             system in non-vital teeth.
                           61. Orthodontics and dentofacial orthopedics (2)
Subject                        Orthodontics& Dentofacial Orthopedic 2     Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff             Theorotical: Prof.Mouhamad Yousef, Nasser Sawan, Asociate prof. Ayham
                           Kaddah, Imad Kaaid.
                           Practical: Prof.Mouhamad Yousef, Prof. Nasser Sawan, Asociate prof. Ayham
                           Kaddah, Imad Kaaid, Mehieldin Alrashi, Lwai Mahaini, Rania Haddad,
                           Mwafak Ajaj, Chadi Bredi, Yazan Jahjah+ postgraduate students .
Hours/week                 Theortical: 1 hour.
                           Practical hours: 4 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods, teaching Practical on dental casts, and Cephalometric & photographs analysis.
material, references       Orthodontics textbook + lectures' notes (Orthodontics 1)
Examination (Method,        Practical exam: OSCEs + interviews
Duration)
Learning Outcomes           Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                               1. Biomechanics and tooth movement.
                               2. Orthognathic surgery.
                               3. Correlation between orthodontics and other specialties.
                            Students will be able to:
                               1. Recognize different stages of normal growth of dentofacial complex.
                               2. Evaluate different diagnostic methods in orthodontics
                               3. Apply preventive procedures in orthodontics.
                               4. Differentiate types of malocclusion and dentofacial deformities.
                               5. Compare types of orthodontic appliances, their indications, timing,
                                   advantages and disadvantages.
                               6. Apply principles of orthodontic treatment (timing and limitations).
                               7. Plan orthodontic treatment in different ages.
Content                        1.  Principles of orthodontics and malocclusion.
                               2.  Normal growth and development of dentofacial complex.
                               3.  The etiology of dentofacial deformities.
                               4.  Principles of orthodontic diagnosis (clinical and functional examination
                                   + radiographic, cephalometric and model investigations).
                               5. Classifications of malocclusion and dentofacial deformities.
                               6. The most important dentofacial deformities (development, causes,
                                   diagnosis and treatments).
                               7. Principles of malocclusion and biomechanics and teeth movement.
                               8. Principles of orthodontic appliances (types and their functions).
                               9. Principles of orthodontic treatment (timing and limitation).
                               10. Prevention in orthodontics.
                               11. Early orthodontic treatment and interceptive treatment.
                               12. Orthodontic treatment in mixed dentition.
                               13. Orthodontic treatment for adults.
                               14. Orthognathic surgery.
                                        62. Periodontology (3)
Subject                                   Periodontology 3                  Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff          Theorotically: Professor. Razan Khattab, Professor.Usama Ebrahim,Prof.
                        Sharif Alashkar, A. Prof. Rwaida Saimeh. A.pro. Suliman Dayoub, A.prof.
                        Monzer Sabbagh, A.prof. Ali Abu Suliman, A.Prof. Tarek Shwaiki
                        Practically: Professor.Usama Ebrahim,A. Prof. Rwaida Saimeh. A.pro.
                        Suliman Dayoub, A.prof. Monzer Sabbagh, A.prof. Ali Abu Suliman, A.Prof.
                        Tarek Shwaiki+postgraduate students.
Hours/week              Theoretical hours: 1 hours weekly
                        Practical hours: 4 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures + textbook + lectures' notes + Review in
teaching material,   Periodontology (reference book)
references           Practically: Clinical periodontology treatments for 12-16 cases (on patients).+
                     seminar/poster presentation
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)            Practical exam: interviews+ clinical diagnosis and accordingly planning of an
                     appropriate treatment for cases shown on PowerPoint or video
Learning Outcomes    Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                         1. Implant & regenerative periodontal therapy (bone grafts, gingival grafts
                             ridge augmentation)
                         2. Application of laser in periodontology
                     Students will be able to:
                            1. Apply mechanical periodontal treatment (scaling and roots plaining).
                            2. Manage different types of periodontal non-surgical treatments.
                            3. Treat occlusal trauma.
                            4. Perform procedures of giningivactomy and flaps (participating with
                               postgraduate students)
                            5. Recognize the relationship beween periodontology and other dental
                               specialization.
Content                      1. Regenerative periodontal therapy.
                             2. Bone grafts.
                             3. Gingival grafts ridge augmentation.
                             4. Occlusal trauma and its therapy.
                             5. Laser and periodontology therapy.
                             6. Clinical aspects of dental implants.
                             7. Aesthetic considerations in dental implants.
                             8. Diagnosis and treatment of peri-implantitis.
                             9. Orthodontic and periodontology.
                             10. Evidence-based decision making.
                                       63. Oral Rehabilitation
Subject                                 Oral Rehabilitation                 Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Therrotically: Professor. Fandi Alshaarani.
                       Practically: Professor. Fandi Alshaarani, Professor. Omar Alaadel, Asociate
                       Professor. Mirza Allaf, Asociate professor. Nabeel Houri, Assistnat professor.
                       Faisal Sbaiey and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, textbook + lectures' notes
teaching material,     Practically: Clinical on patients + lab work on dental casts+ a case study
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes      Students will be able to:
                           1. Assess physiologic movements of the mandible.
                           2. Diagnose oral rehabilitation cases and assess indications and
                               contraindications for oral rehabilitation
                           3. Recognize the relationship between different specializations and oral
                               rehabilitation.
                           4. Compare different types of articulators and their use for oral rehabilitation.
                           5. Plan treatments for rehabilitation of patients' dentition.
                           6. Manage tooth wear.
Content                   1. Physiologic principles of mandible movements
                          2. Using articulators for oral rehabilitation
                          3. Oral rehabilitation and restorative dentistry
                          4. Oral rehabilitation and periodontology
                          5. Oral rehabilitation and orthodontic.
                          6. Oral rehabilitation and orthognathic surgery.
                          7. Oral rehabilitation and TMDs
                          8. Oral rehabilitation and removable prosthodontics
                          9. Oral rehabilitation and occlusion
                          10. Oral rehabilitation and implantology
                          11. Dental splinting
                          12. Tooth wear
                          13. Indications and contraindications for oral rehabilitation
                                   64. Anesthesia and Extraction (4)
Subject                           Anesthesia and Extraction(4)              Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri, Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate
                       prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit,
                       Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel
                       Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah.
                       Practical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri, Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate
                       prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit,
                       Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel
                       Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah + Dr. Mohammad
                       Almekdad, Dr. Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Practical hours:4 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Anesthesia textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical: Clinical on patients.
references
Examination (Method,   Practical exam: Interviews.
Duration)
Learning Outcomes      Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Extraction of impacted molars, and canines.
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Apply basic principles of teeth extraction.
                          2. Prepare patients for surgical procedures.
                          3. Manage post extraction complications.
                          4. Instruct patients with proper recommendation for post extraction care.
Content                          Principles of tooth extraction.
                                 Armamentarium used in teeth extraction.
                                 Systemic diseases and extraction.
                                 Non surgical extraction.
                                 Surgical extraction.
                                 Extraction of impacted molars and canines
                                 Post extraction care.
                                 Post extraction complications.
                                     65. Ethics and forensic Dentistry

Subject                             Ethics and forensic Dentistry            Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff           Therrotically: Professor. Faisal Dayoub, and Asociate professor. Ammar Mashlah.
Hours/week               Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly
Teaching Methods,    Theoretically: PowerPoint lectures, lectures' notes
teaching material,
references
Examination (Method, Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)
Learning Outcomes    Students will aquire knowledge and understanding of:
                        1. Forensic dentistry and methods used.
                        2. History of dental practice.
                        3. Islamic medicine, and famous medical scientists
                     Students will be able to:
                        1. Apply preventive care and other dental practices professionally.
                        2. Treat patients with highest ethical level.
                        3. Apply deontology in dental practice.
                        4. Recognize regulations of general dental council.
                        5. Recognize moral duties of dentists.
                        6. Identify physical signs of child abuse
Content                 1. Introduction.
                        2. Forensic dentistry.
                        3. Scientific methods of identification.
                        4. Accordance of DNA.
                        5. Forensic photography.
                        6. Bite marks; techniques and terminologies.
                        7. Dentist role in investigations and prevention of children abuse.
                        8. Natural disasters tests.
                        9. Old history of dentistry.
                        10. Legend prescriptions in prevention and treatment, and Arabic role in
                            discontinue using them.
                        11. Preventative care.
                        12. Medicine taken after profit Mouhammad in Islam.
                        13. Famous Islamic medical scientists.
                        14. Anesthesia in dentistry.
                        15. development in replacement teeth industry.
                        16. Dental treatment in Arabic scientific tradition.
                        17. Law of dentistry.
                        18. General Dental Council (GDC) and its aims.
                        19. Registration with the GDC and loosing and regaining membership.
                        20. Dentistry and rules of deontology.
                        21. Moral duties of professional dentists.
                        22. GDC regulations (general, financial, legal, election, conferences, fees related
                            conflicts, etc .)
                                 66. Oral and maxillofacial surgery
Subject                           Oral and maxillofacial surgery             Study Year 5 Semester 2
Teaching Staff         Theorotical: Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof. Haitham Bahah,
                       Asociate prof. Issam khouri, Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal, Asociate prof. Safwan
                       Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin Garabit, Assistant prof.
                       Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant prof. Basel Brad,
                       Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasaba.
                       Practical: Prof. Abdalla Tlimat, Prof. Eisa Wahba, Prof. Munir Harfoush, Prof.
                       Haitham Bahah, Asociate prof. Issam khouri , Associate prof. Yaser Mdalal,
                       Asociate prof. Safwan Jaber, Asociate prof. Mazen Zenati, Assistant prof. Zavin
                       Garabit, Assistant prof. Khaldoon Darwish, Assistant prof. Hasan Jaafo, Assistant
                       prof. Basel Brad, Assistant prof. Ali Jbara, Assistant prof. Samer Kasabah + Dr.
                       Mohammad Almekdad, Dr. Mohammad Shamseldin and postgraduate students.
Hours/week             Theoretical hours: 2 hours weekly.
                       Practical hours: 2 hours weekly.
Teaching Methods,      Theoretical: Oral and maxillofacial surgery textbook + lectures' notes.
teaching material,     Practical:.
references
Examination (Method,   Theoretical exam: MCQs (one hour)
Duration)              Practical exam: Interviews.
Learning Outcomes      Students will acquire knowledge and understanding of:
                          1. Basic principles of orthognathic surgery, surgical treatment of jaw
                               fractures and deformities, and implantology
                          2. Treatment of Jaws and oral tumors.
                          3. Diseases of maxillary sinus, TMJ, and salivary glands.
                          4. Periapical surgery
                       Students will be able to:
                          1. Apply basic principles in oral and jaws surgery.
                          2. Treat septic diseases in oral cavity.
                          3. Manage TMJ disorders
Content                   1. Patient presentation.
                          2. Odontogenic infections.
                          3. Osteomylitis and osteoradionecrosis.
                          4. Cellulitis.
                          5. Periapical surgery.
                          6. Facial fractures.
                          7. Orthognathic surgery.
                          8. Surgical management of dentofacial deformities.
                          9. Salivary glands diseases.
                          10. Maxillary sinus diseases.
                          11. Management of temporomandibular disorders.
                          12. Principles of Implantology.
Appendix B           CV of teaching staff


Personnel manual

      Name
     Position




 Academic record




   Work record


Research projects
 over the past 5
     years




   Publications




     Work in
   professional
organizations over
 the past 5 years
Appendix C: Literature, reports and teaching materials


Library of the Faculty specific Literature

Fixed prosthodontics


Area             Title                    Author           Year     Publisher
Fixed            Planning          and    Bernard       GN 1998     Martin dunitz
prosthodontics   making crowns and        Smith
                 bridges
Fixed            Esthetics         and    Jens Fisher        1999   Quintessence
prosthodontics   prosthetics       and                              books
                 interdisciplinary
                 consideration of the
                 state of the art
Fixed            Fundamentals        of   Herbert            1991   Quintessence
prosthodontics   tooth preparations       T.Shillinburg             books
Fixed            Esthetic approach to     Klans Muterthies   1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   metal         ceramic                              books
                 restorations       for
                 mandibular anterior
                 region
Fixed            Crowns                   Brecker            1961   Saunders
prosthodontics                                                      company
Fixed            Guide to occlusal        Herbert            2000   Quintessence
prosthodontics   waxing                   T.Shillinburg             books
Fixed            The polychromatic        Ludwig A.Rinn      1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   layering technique                                 books
Fixed            Occlusion         and    Iven Klineburg/ 2004      Wright
prosthodontics   clinical practice        Rob Jagger
Fixed            Protocols          for   Irfan Ahmad     2006      Blackwell
prosthodontics   predictable aesthetic
                 dental restorations
Fixed            Prsthese conjointe       L.Roucoules        1974   Librairie
prosthodontics                                                      maloine
Fixed            Prosthodontics    in Robert Sklugman        2002   Martin dunitz
prosthodontics   clinical practice
Fixed            Evaluation,diagnosis Peter E.Dawson         1974   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   and treatment of                                   company
                 occlusal problems
Fixed            Evaluation,diagnosis Peter E.Dawson         1974   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   and treatment of                                   company
                 occlusal problems
Fixed            Theory and practice      Stanly D.Tylman/ 1978     C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   of               fixed   Willam                    company
                 prosthodontics           F.P.Malone
Fixed            Dental       ceramics    John W.Mclean    1983     Quintessence
prosthodontics   proceedings of the                                 books
                 first    international
                 symposium           on
                 ceramics
Fixed            Practical                Harold R.Horn      1976   W.B.Saunders
prosthodontics   considerations for
                 successful crowns
                 and bridges
Fixed            Equilibration in the     Hyman Smukler      1991   Quintessence
prosthodontics   natural and restored                               books
                 dentition
Fixed            Creative      ceramic    Ernst              1989   Quintessence
prosthodontics   color:       practical   A.Hegenbarth              books
                 system
Fixed            Modern practice in       John Johnston      1971   Saunders
prosthodontics   crown and bridge
                 prosthodontics
Fixed            Natural ceramics         David Korson       1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics                                                      books
Fixed            Fixed          bridges   DH Roberts         1980   Wright.bristol
prosthodontics   prosthesis
Fixed            Replication         of   Klaus Muterthies   1991   Quintessence
prosthodontics   anterior teeth in the                              books
                 four seasons of life
Fixed            Dentistry in the 21st    Richards           1989   Quintessence
prosthodontics   century a global         Simonsen                  books
                 perspective
Fixed            Basic technique for      Makoto             1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   metal ceramics           Yamamoto                  books
Fixed            Le meulage et le         Paul Bleicher             Bleicher
prosthodontics   fraisage de l'avenir
Fixed            Dental ceramics      Hammerle/Sailer        2008   Quintessence
prosthodontics                        /Tthoma                       books
Fixed            Porcelain   laminate Galip Gruel            2003   Quintessence
prosthodontics   veneers                                            books
Fixed            Esthetics                Mauro Fradeani     2008
prosthodontics   rehabilitation
Fixed            Esthetics analysis   Mauro Frdeani- 2004
prosthodontics                        md
Fixed            Introduction      to W.Patrick Naylor 2009         Quintessence
prosthodontics   metal        ceramic                               books
                 technology
Fixed            Prosthetic              Giulio Preti        2008   Quintessence
prosthodontics   rehabilitation                                     books
Fixed            Fundamentals      of    Herbert             1997   Quintessence
prosthodontics   fixed prosthodontics    T.Shillinburg              books
Fixed            Fundamentals      of    Claude              1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   esthetics               R.Rufenacht                books
Fixed            Precision in dental     Massironi d.        2007   Quintessence
prosthodontics   esthetics                                          books
Fixed            Dental materials in     George Eliades      2003   Quintessence
prosthodontics   vivo aging and                                     books
                 related phenomena
Fixed            Fiber-reinforced        Martin A.Freilich   2000   Quintessence
prosthodontics   composite                                          books
Fixed            Textbook          of    Deepak              2003   Jaypee
prosthodontics   prosthodontics          Nallaswamy
Fixed            Contemporary fixed      Rosenstiel/         2006   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   prosthodontics          Land/Fujimoto              company
Fixed            Contemporary fixed      Rosenstiel/         2001   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   prosthodontics          Land/Fujimoto              company
Fixed            Fundamentals color      Stephen J.Chu       2004   Quintessence
prosthodontics                                                      books
Fixed            Functional occlusion    Peter E.Dawson      1989   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   from TMJ to smile                                  company
                 design
Fixed            Quintessence       of   Avishai Sadan       2007   30th
prosthodontics   dental technology                                  anniversary
                 QDT
Fixed            Quintessence       of   John A.Sorensen     2008   quintessence
prosthodontics   denal technology
Fixed            Metal-free esthetic     Carlos Eduardo      2003   Quintessence
prosthodontics   restoration                                        books
Fixed            Esthetics of anterior   J.Chiche /Pinault   1994   Quintessence
prosthodontics   fixed prosthodontics                               books
Fixed            Statements              Roulet/Kappert      2009   Quintessence
prosthodontics                                                      books
Fixed            Change your smile      Ronald               1997   Quintessence
prosthodontics                          E.Goldstein                 books
Fixed            Electroforming in Wirz/Hoffmann             2000   Quintessence
prosthodontics   restorative dentistry                              books
Fixed            Precission      fixed M.Martignoni/         1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   prosthodontics:        A.Schonenberger             books
                 clinical          and
                 laboratory aspects
Fixed            Fundamentals        of Claude               1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   esthetics              R.Rufenacht                 books
Fixed            A diary through the      Naoki Hayashi      2005   Quintessence
prosthodontics   lens                                               books
Fixed            Inspiration      traly   David Korson       2005   Quintessence
prosthodontics   natural         tooth                              books
                 restoration
Fixed            Nature's                 Kataoka/           2002   Quintessence
prosthodontics   morphology               Nishimura                 books
Fixed            Solutions of dental      Toyohiko Hidaka    2008   Quintessence
prosthodontics   esthetics                                          books
Fixed            Natural esthetics        Dario Adolfi       2002   Quintessence
prosthodontics                                                      books
Fixed            Osseointegration         S.Hobo/E.Ichida/   1990   Quintessence
prosthodontics   and           occlusal   T.Garcia                  books
                 rehabilitation
Fixed            Porceline laminate       Garber/Goldstein/ 1988
prosthodontics   veneer                   Feinman
Fixed            Porceline          and   Garber/Goldstein 1994     Quintessence
prosthodontics   composite                                          books
                 inlay&onlay esthetic
                 posterior
                 restorations
Fixed            Tylman's theory and      V.f.P.Malone/      1993   Ishiyku
prosthodontics   practice of fixed        D.L.Koth                  euroamerica,inc
                 prosthodontics
Fixed            Dental      laboratory   Eissmann Rudd      1980   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   procedures                                         company
Fixed            Textbook of crown        George E.Myers     1969   C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   and            bridges                             company
                 prosthodontics
Fixed            Practical crown and      Wyman            1962     Mc    GRAW-
prosthodontics   bridge                   H.Wilson/ Robert          HILL    book
                 proshodontics            L.Lang                    company
Fixed            Atlas of crown and       Lawrence      A 1965      C.V MOSBY
prosthodontics   bridge                   Weinberg                  company
                 prosthodontics
Fixed            Change your smile   Ronald                  1984   Quintessence
prosthodontics                       E.Goldstein                    books
Fixed            Restoration cerame- P.Coustaing             1985   SDFA
prosthodontics   metalliques
Fixed            prothese conjointe  L.Roucoules             1972   Librairie
prosthodontics                                                      maloine
Fixed            The determinants of Gilbert T.Katz          1964   University     of
prosthodontics   human occlusion                                    southern
                                                                    California
Fixed            Dental implants          R. Winkelman/ 1994        Wolfe
prosthodontics                            Orth
Fixed            Esthetic      dentistry    B.Touati/           1999   Martin dunitz
prosthodontics   and            ceramic     P.Miara/
                 restoration                D.Nathanson
Fixed            Full             mouth     Elliot Feinberg     1971   J.B Lippincott
prosthodontics   restoration in daily                                  company
                 practice
Fixed            Color      atlas     of    G.Freedman/         1990   Ishiyaku
prosthodontics   laminate veneers           G.Mclaughlin               euroAmerica
Fixed            Techniques ceramo-         R.Bugugnani         1980   Julien prelat
prosthodontics   metaliques
Fixed            Theorie       de     la    Stanley Tylman      1975   Julien prelat
prosthodontics   prothese      partielle
                 conjointe
Fixed            Notions cliniques en       A.Jeanmonod         1971   Maloine
prosthodontics   prothese conjointe
Fixed            Ney crown and              M.Balak             1972   Ney
prosthodontics   bridge manual
Fixed            Tylman's theory and        W.F.P. Malone/ 2002      AIPD
prosthodontics   practice of fixed          D.L. Koth
Fixed            Quintessence         of    Robert Chapman 1990/1991 Quintessence
prosthodontics   dental technology                                   books
Fixed            Osseointegration           Hobo/Ichida/   1990      Quintessence
prosthodontics   and           occlusal     Garcia                   books
                 rehabilitation
Fixed            Fixed            bridge    D.H Roberts         1973   Wright
prosthodontics   prosthese
Fixed            Modern practice in         Johnson/Phillips/   1986   W.B.saunders
prosthodontics   fixed prosthodontics       Dykema                     company
Fixed            Resine-bonded              WM Tay              1990   Martin duntiz
prosthodontics   bridge
Fixed            Practical crown and        Wyman               1962   Mc graw-hill
prosthodontics   bridge                     H.Wilson
                 prosthodontics
Fixed            Inlays crowns and          Colin R Cowell      1979   Wright
prosthodontics   bridges
Fixed            Inlays          crowns     Colin R Cowell      1985   Wright
prosthodontics   bridges
Fixed            Introduction          a'   Harry C.Lundeen     1969   Julien prelat
prosthodontics   l;anatomie
Fixed            The physiological          F.V.Celenza         1975
prosthodontics   developmental        of
                 occlusal
                 morphology
Fixed            Vissage-collage en         Alain L.Rochette    1970   Julien prelat
prosthodontics   odonto-stomatologie
Fixed            Les      restaurations     J.Morera
prosthodontics   transitoires         en
                 prothese conjointe
Fixed            Planning           and     Bernard Smith      2007   Martin duntiz
prosthodontics   making crowns and
                 bridges
Fixed            Protocols           for    Irfan Ahmad        2006   Blackwell
prosthodontics   predictable aesthetic
                 dental restorations
Fixed            Irriversable oramic        Sidney     Kina/ 2008     Artes medicas
prosthodontics   esthetic restorations      August Brugura
Fixed            Aesthetic dentistry        Howard Stean     1992     Quintessence
prosthodontics   with indirect resins                                 books
Fixed            Couronnes             a'   M.A Rivault        1972   Librarie
prosthodontics   incrustation                                         maloine
                 vestibulaire
                 couronnes ceramo-
                 metalliques
Fixed            History of dental          Robert          J. 1958   J.B Lippincott
prosthodontics   laboratories               Rothstein                 company
Fixed            Technique           for    M.Haga/            1990   Ishiyaku
prosthodontics   porceline laminate         A.Nakazawa                EuroAmerica
                 veneers
Paediatric
dentistry
Area         Title          Author                 Year   Publisher
PAEDIATRIC   Poket Book of Nikhil Morwah           2008   Jaypee
DENTISTRY    Pedodontics
Paediatric   Restoratise    Dug gal                2008   Inforina
dentistry    Techniques  in
             Paediatric
             Dentistry
Paediatric   Principles     Arathi Rao             2008   Jay pee Brother
dentistry                                                 Medical
Paediatric   Promoting           Aubrey She ham    2006   Quintessence
dentistry    Children's Oral                              Editor Ltda
             health
Paediatric   Community oral Cynthia June           2007   Quintessence
dentistry    Health
Paediatric   Hand book of Angus Cameron            2007   Mosby
dentistry    Pediatric
             Dentistry 2nd ed
Paediatric   Handbook         of                   1997   Mosby
dentistry    Pediatric
             Dentistry
Paediatric   Pediatric            Pinkham          1999   W.B.Saunders
dentistry    Dentistry infancy                            company
             through
             adolescence
Paediatric   Clinical use of      ENID GILBERT-    2003   Lippincott
dentistry    Pediatric                                    Williams
             Diagnostic Tests                             &Wilkins
Paediatric   A clinical Guide     BERMAN_BLANCO 2007      Mosby
dentistry    To          Dental
             Traumatoloqu
Paediatric   Current Pediatric    WILLIAM W        2003   Lange-
dentistry    Diagnoses                                    Libraries-Beirut
             8treatment
Paediatric   Nelson Essentials    ROBERT    M.KLI- 2006   Elsevier
dentistry    of Pediatrics        EGMAN                   Saunders
Paediatric   Color Txt book WILLIAM                      2007   Mosby Elsevier
dentistry    of      Pediatric L.WESTON
             Dermatology

Paediatric   Treatment              MITS     UHIRO 2000         Quintessence
dentistry    Planning         for   TSUKIBOSNI
             Traumatized
             teeth
Paediatric   Orthodontics and       DECLAN MILLETT              Churchill
dentistry    Pediatric                                          Livingstone
             Dentistry
Paediatric   Hand book of           HORRIS CLARK         2003   MOSBY
dentistry    Nitrous oxide and
             oxygen sedation
Paediatric   Hand book of           MORRIS CLARK         2008   MOSBY
dentistry    Nitrous oxide and
             oxygen sedation
Paediatric   Restorative            MS DUGGAL            2002   Martin Dunit3
dentistry    Techniques        in
             Pediatric
             Dentistry
Paediatric   ‫المرشد في أصول‬         ‫د.محمد زياد العاني‬          ‫دار المعلقة الجامعية‬
dentistry    ‫التخدير الموضعي في‬
              ‫طب األسنان‬
Paediatric   Dentistry for the      Mc DONALD            2004   Mosby
dentistry    child           and
             adolescent
Paediatric   A color Atlas of       CRISPIAN SCULLY      2002   Martin Dunit3
dentistry    Or facial Health
             and Disease in
             children        and
             adolescents
             Diagnose        and
             Management
Paediatric    ‫طب أسنان األطفال‬      ‫د.محمد نبيه خردجي‬    1999   ‫جامعة تشرين كلية‬
dentistry                                                       ‫طب األسنان‬
Paediatric   Dentistry For The      KENNETH                     PSG Publishing
dentistry    Handicapped            E.WESSELS                   Company
             Patient
Paediatric   Management of          LOUIS.R RIPA         1979   PSG Publishing
dentistry    dental behavior                                    Company
             in children
Paediatric   Occlusal               MINORU NAKATA        1988   Ishiyaku Euro
dentistry    Guidance       In                                  America,Inc
             Pediatric
             Dentistry
Paediatric    Pediatric           Pinkham         2005   Elsevier
dentistry    Dentistry       In                          Saunders
             fancy Through
             Adolescence
Paediatric   Pediatric     Oral   L.KABAN         2004   Elsevie
dentistry    And                                         rsaundeks
             Maxillofacial
             Surgery
Paediatric   Dentistry For The    R.McDONELD      1978   Mosby
dentistry    Child          and
             Adolescent
Paediatric   Dentistry For The    R.McDONELD      1994   Mosby
dentistry    Child          and
             Adolescent
Paediatric   Pediatric            GORAN KOCH      2001   Munksgaarol
dentistry    Dentistry "Achiui
             cal Approach"
Paediatric   Fundamental of       R.MATHEWSON     1995   Quintessence
dentistry    Pediatric
             Dentistry
Paediatric   Sedation A guide     STANLEY         2003   MOSBY
dentistry    to         Patient   F.MALAMED
             Management
Paediatric   Four-Handed          JOSEPH          1978   THE
dentistry    Dentistry       In   E.CHASTEEN             C.V.MOSBY
             Clinical Practice                           COMPANY
Paediatric   Text Book Of         BRAHAM MORRIC   1988   B.C.Decker
dentistry    Pediatric                                   INC
             Dentistry
Paediatric   Pediatric            J.R.PINKHAM     1988   W.B.Saunders
dentistry    Dentistry Infancy                           company
             Through
             Adolexence
Paediatric   Pediatric     Oral   KABAN           1990   W.B.Saunpers
dentistry    And                                         Company
             Maxillofacial
             Surgery
Paediatric
dentistry
Paediatric   Pediatric       Stephen H.Y.Wei      1988   Lea &Fibiger
dentistry    Dentistry Total
             Patient Care
Paediatric   Behavioral           WILBERT           1976   MOSBY
dentistry    Methods        For   E.FORDYCE
             Chronic Pair And
             Illness
Paediatric   Nelson Textbook      BEHRMAN                  W.B.Saunders
dentistry    Of Pediatrics                                 company
Paediatric   An Atlas Of          H.S.DUTERLOO             Wolfe
dentistry    Dentition       in                            Publishing ltd
             Childhood
             ,orthodontic
             diagnosis
             panoramic Radio
             Logy
Paediatric   The        Human     Bertram S.Kraus   1965   Lea&Febiger
dentistry    Dentition Before
             Birth
Paediatric   Dentistry For The    RALPH             1988   C.V.MOSBY
dentistry    Child         And    E.McDONALD               COMPANY
             Adslescent
Paediatric   Pediatric            D.B.KENNDY        1979   Wriqht &Sons
dentistry    Operative                                     Limited
             Dentistry
Paediatric   Sta tistics In       J.S.Bulman        1989   B.D.J
dentistry    Dentistry
Paediatric   The Treatment of     RONALD                   Quintessence
dentistry    Traumatized          JOHNSON                  Pub     lashing
             Incisor in the                                co.inc
             Child
Paediatric   An Atlas Of          DAVID LAW         1969   W.B.Saunders
dentistry    Pedodontics
Paediatric   Pediatric     Oral   BRUGE-SANDERS     1979   MOSBY
dentistry    And
             Maxillofacial
             Surgery
Paediatric   Introduction Ala     R.BERAKD          1972   Masson Et Cie
dentistry    Pratique Dentaire                             And Julian
             Chez L'Enfant
Paediatric   Acolour Atlas of     R.RAPP            1979   Wolf Medical
dentistry    Clinical                                      Publications
             Conditions      in
             Paedodontics
Paediatric   Atlas          De    DAVID B.LAW       1973   Julian
dentistry    Pedodontie                                    Prelat,Editeur
Paediatric   An Atlas Of          DAVIS             1981
dentistry    Pedodontics
Paediatric   The Dental Care      JOAN WEYMAN       1971   Churchill
dentistry    Of Handicapped
             Children
Paediatric   The Management       J.A.HARGREAVEK   1970   E&S
dentistry    of Traumatized                               LIVINGSTON
             Anterior    Teeth                            E
             Of children
Paediatric   Les Traumatisms      CAPRIOGLIO       1990   MASSON
dentistry    Dents
             Anterieures En
             Pedodontie
Paediatric   Pediatric            THOMAS           1982   WRIGHT PSG
dentistry    Dentistry            K.BARBER
Paediatric   Practical            R.H.BIRCH        1973   CHURCHILL
dentistry    Paedodontics                                 LIVINGSTON
                                                          E
Paediatric   Human Growth         W.A.MARSHALL     1977   AGADEMIC
dentistry    And Its Disorders                            PRESS
Paediatric   Dental Care For      BRUCE HUNTEK     1987   WRIGHT
dentistry    Handicapped
             Patients
Paediatric   Diagnostic           W.P .Rock               WOLFE
dentistry    Picture         In                           MEDICAL
             Pediatric                                    PUBLICATIO
             Dentistry                                    NS
Paediatric   Clinical             SIDNEY B. FINN   1973   Ishiyaku
dentistry    Pedodontics
Paediatric   Clinical             SIDNEY B. FINN   1991   W.B.SAUNDE
dentistry    Pedodontics                                  RS COMPUNY
Paediatric   Dentistry     For    C.R.CASTATDI     1980   W.B.SAUNDE
dentistry    Adolescents                                  RS COMPUNY
Paediatric   Pedodoutics "A       P.J. Schmidt     1981   MUNKSGAAR
dentistry    systematic                                   D
             Approach"
Paediatric   Pediatric            M.MICHAEL        1961   THE
dentistry    Dentistry            CHOHEN                  C.V.MOSBY
Paediatric   The        Human     BERTRAM          1995   LEA&FEBIGE
dentistry    Dentition Before     S.KRAUS                 R
             Birth
Paediatric   Human        Dent    D.H. Goose              Pergamum
dentistry    facial Growth                                press
Paediatric   Child      Dental                     1975   WRIGHT
dentistry    Health                                       .13RISTOL
Paediatric   Crania      facial   G.H.SPERBER             WRIGHT
dentistry    Embry logy
Paediatric   GRANIO               WRIGHT.PSG              WRIGHT
dentistry    FACIAL
                 EMDGOLOYY
Paediatric       The                  MURIELE. MORLY    1972   MORLEY
dentistry        Development
                 And Disorders Of
                 Speech          In
                 Childhood
Paediatric       Diagnostic           W.P.ROCK          1988   WOLFE
dentistry        Picture Tesnsts In
                 Pediatric
                 Dentistry
Paediatric       Develop Ment Of      FRANS P.G.M.WAN          HARBER
dentistry        The        Human     DER LINDEN               &ROW
                 Dentition      An
                 Atlas
Paediatric       Text Book Of         NIKHIL MARWAL     2009   JAPEE
dentistry        Pediatric
Periodontology   Clinical             JAN LINDHE        2008   .Blackwell
                 Periodontology
                 And Ian Plant
                 Dentistruc
Periodontology   Clinical             JAN LINDHE        2008   Blackwell
                 Periodontology
                 And Ian Plant
                 Dentistruc
Periodontology   Critical             HALL              2008   BC    DECKER
                 Decisions'      In                            IN
                 Period ontology
Periodontology   Essentials     Of    SHANTIPRIYA       2008   Jaypee
                 Clinical             REDDY
                 Periodontics
Periodontology   ClinicalPeriodont    CARRANZA          1990   Saunders
                 ology
Periodontology   Tissue               LYNCH             2008   Quintessence
                 Engineering                                   Publishing Co
Periodontology   Clinical Period      CARRANZA          2006   Saunders
                 ontology
Periodontology   Fundamentals Of      WILSON            2003   Quintessence
                 Periodontal                                   Publishing Co
Periodontology   Periodontal          NEVINS            1998   Quintessence
                 Therapy                                       Publishing Co
Periodontology   Diagnosis And        PER ATELSSON      2002   Quintessence
                 Risk Predication                              Publishing Co
                 Of Periodontal
Periodontology   Periodontal          SCHIUGER          1977   Library      Of
                 Disease                                       Congress
                                                            Cataloging
Periodontology   Clinical Period    CARRANZA         1996   Saunders
                 ontology                                   Company
Periodontology   Clinical Period    CARRANZA         2004   Saunders
                 ontology
Periodontology   Color Atlas Of     KLAUS            1985   GEORG
                 Period ontology    H.M.RATETISCHA          .THIEME
                                    CK                      STUTTGARL
Periodontology   Periedontics       LOUIS    F.ROSE-        MOSBY
                                    BAINL.MEALEY
Periodontology   Periodontal        G.LASKARIS       2003   SPRINGER-
                 Manifestations     C.SCULLG                VERLOG
                 Of Local And
                 Systemic
                 Diseases
Periodontology   Periodontal                         1994   MOSBY        -
                 surgery                                    WOLFE
Periodontology   Periodontics   B.MELEY              2004   BRITISH
                                                            LIBRARY
                                                            CATALOLGUI
                                                            NG
Periodontology   Periodontics       BALINT ORBAN     19     HENRY
                                                            KIMPTON
Periodontology   Text book of PAUL N.BAER           1977    J.B.LIPPINCO
                 periodontics                               TT COMPONY
Periodontology   The     practiceot SIONEY SORRIN           McGraw-
                 periodontia                                LTILLBOOK
Periodontology   Periodontia        GOLDMAN     AND 1957    MOSBY
                                    COHEN                   COMPANY
Periodontology   Clinical Period                    1979    UNITED       –
                 ontology                                   STATES-
                                                            AMERICA
Periodontology   Tooth support      A.SYMPOSIUM      1965   UNITED       –
                                                            STATES
Periodontology   Guide            to WMM     JENKINS 1994   BUTTER
                 periodontics        CTALLAN                WORTH-
                                                            HEINEMONN
Periodontology   Basic              ABRYAN WADE             WILKINS
                 periodontology                             COMPANY
Periodontology   Periodontics       DANIEL A.GRANT   1979   C.V. MOSBY

Periodontology   Periodontal        HENRY            1960   MOSBY
                 therapy            M.GDLDMAN               COMPANY
Periodontology   Periodontal        HENRY            1973   MOSBY
                 therapy            M.GDLDMAN               COMPANY
Periodontology   Periodontal        HENRY            1968   MOSBY
                 therapy              M.GDLDMAN                COMPANY
Periodontology   Aclour atlas of      J.D.STRAHAN       1980   WOLFE
                 periodontology       &I.M.WAITE               MEDICAL
Periodontology   Aclour atlas of      I.M.WAITE         1990   WOLFE
                 periodontology                                PUBLICATIO
                                                               NS
Periodontology   Contemporary         ROBERT            1990   MOSBY
                 periodontics         J.GENCON                 COMPANY
Periodontology   Aclour atlas of      SHIRO KINOSHITA   1985   ISHIYAKO
                 periodontics
Periodontology   Periodontal          CLAVDES NABERS    1990   B.C.DECLEER
                 therapy
Periodontology   The periodontal      BKB BERKOVITZ     1990   MOSBY-
                 ligament        in                            WOLFE
                 health         and
                 disease
Periodontology   Decision making      WALTER B.HALL     1988   B.C.DECKER
                 in periodontology
Periodontology   Periodontac          ARTHUR GRIEDER    1968   MOSBY
                 porsthesis
Periodontology   Periodontal          ARTHUR GRIEDER    1968   MOSBY
                 porsthesis                                    COMPANY
Periodontology   Clinical Period      IRHINB            1966   W.B.SAUNDE
                 ontology             GLICKMAN                 RS
Periodontology   Contmporary                            1996   W.B.SAUNDE
                 periodontal                                   RS COMPANY
                 instrumentaaior
Periodontology   Techniqves and       DOROTHY.A         1990   W.B.SAUNDE
                 theory          of                            RS
                 periodontal
                 instrvmentation
Periodontology   Periodontology       SIYWRAD           1989   ISHIXAKN
                 and periodontics     R.RMFJORD                EURO
                 modern      theory                            AINERICA.IN
                 and practical                                 C
Periodontology   Manual of clincal    FRANCIS G.SERIO          LEXI.COMPIN
                 periodonticol                                 C

Periodontology   Orban,s              DANIEL GRANI      1963   THE
                 periodotics                                   C.V.MOSBY
                                                               COMPANY
Periodontology   Orban,s              DANIEL GRANI      1968   THE
                 peruiodontics                                 C.V.MOSBY
                                                               COMPANY
Periodontology   Orban,s              DANIEL GRANI      1972   THE
                 peruiodontics                                 C.V.MOSBY
                                                            COMPANY
Periodontology   Mechanisms of JOHN EHORTON                 INFORMENTI
                 localized bone                             ON
                                                            RETRIEVAL
Periodontology   Periodontal           WILSON        1999   QUINTESSEN
                 regeneration                               S
                 enhanced                                   PUBLISHING
Periodontology   Management of         DETINVILLE    2005   QUINTESSEN
                 advanceel                                  S
                 periodontits
Periodontology   Biomimetics in        DIVID         2003   QUINTESSEN
                 periodntal                                 S
                 regeneratior
Periodontology   Advanced              PRICHARD      1965   SAUNDERS
                 periodontal
                 desease surgical
                 and     prosthetic
                 management
                 Periodontal           GRACE         1989   QUINTESSEN
                 control                                    S
Periodontology   Parodontologie        MARMASSE      1968   MASSON
Periodontology   Manuel         de     PAWLAK        1988   MASSON
                 parodontologie                             TRADUCTION
                                                            FRANCAIE
Periodontology   Periodontal           SATO          2000   QUINTESSEN
                 suegery-aclinical                          CE
                 atlas                                      PUBLISHING
Periodontology   An introduction       GOLDMAN       1962   NIOSRY
                 to periodontia
Periodontology   An introduction       GOLDMAN       1959   MOSBY
                 to periodontia                             COMPANY
Periodontology   An introduction                     1966   MOSBY
                 to periodontia
Periodontology   An introduction       HEMEG.M.      1969   C.V.MOSBY
                 to periodontia        GOLDMAN
Periodontology   Introduction to       HEMEG.M.      1977   C.V.MOSBY
                 periodontia           GOLDMAN
Periodontology   An outline of         J.D.MANSON    1983   WRIGHT. PSC
                 periodiontics
Periodontology   Essentials       of   REDDY         2006   REDDY
                 clinical
                 periodontology
                 and periodontics
occlusion        Mouth rehabili        MAXKORNFELD   1974   THE    C.V.
                 tation clinical aud                        MOSBY
                 laboratory                                 COMPANY
            procedures

occlusion   Atext book of CALDWELL               1977   W.B.SAUNDE
            preventive          STALLARD                RS
            dintistry
occlusion   Atext book of STALLARD               1982   W.B.SAUNDE
            preventive                                  RS
            dintistry
occlusion   Occlusion           IRAFRANKLIN      1970   THE    C.V.
            aconcepl for the ROSS                       MOSBY
            clinician                                   COMPANY
occlusion   Occlusion           SIYURD           1971   ASH
                                P.RAMFORD
occlusion   Occlusion           JOSE DOSSONTOS   1985   ISHIYAKU
            principles     and                          EUREAMERIC
            concepts                                    A
occlusion   Introduction to ASH                  1982   DIM
            functional
            occlusion
occlusion   Dynamique des ANDRE SOULAIRE         1977   JULIEN
            occlusion                                   PRELAT
occlusion   Atext book of MEHL                   1988   TUINTESSEN
            occlusion                                   CE BOOKS
occlusion   Les problemes de PETER DAWSON        1977   JULIEN
            docclusion                                  PRELAT
occlusion   Deutal occlusion A.GERBER            1990   TUINTESSEN
            andthe                                      CE BOOKS
            temporcwand
            ibular
occlusion   Physiologie     de YVES J.FISSORE    1968   ULF POSSELT
            occlusion        et
            renabilitation
occlusion   Physiologie     de YVES J.FISSORE    1968   ULF POSSELT
            occlusion        et
            renabilitation
occlusion   Precision           G.E.RAY          1978   JOUN
            altachments                                 WRIGHT
occlusion   L,occlusin          RAM FJORD        1975   JULIEN
                                                        PRELAT
occlusion   Rebabilitationet                     1978   JULIEN
            prothese maxilo-                            PRELAT
            faciales
occlusion   L,arcade dentaire MAURICE CRETOT     1982   JULIEN
            humaine                                     PRELAT
occlusion   Preventive        DAMINICK P.        1979   PSG
            dentistry                                   PUBLISHING
                                                          CONPANY
occlusion   L,occlusion          JOSE ABJEAN       1977   JULIEN
                                                          PRELAT
occlusion   Occlusion          JOSE            DOS 1996   ISHIYAKU
            principles     and SANTOS,JR                  EURO
            concepls                                      AINERICA.IN
                                                          C
occlusion   Occlusion       ed JACK                1972   JULIEN
            atticulation       CROUSILLAT                 PRELAT
occlusion   Evaluation         PELER E.BAWSON      1974   THE     C.V.
            diagnosis      and                            MOSBY
            lreatment       of                            COMPANY
            occlusal
            prodlems
occlusion   Temporomandi       NATHAN ALLEN               J.B.LIPPIN
            bular                                         COMPANY
            Joinl dys funclion
            Andocclusal
            equilid ralion
occlusion   Temporomand        WELDEN E.BELL       1986   YEARBOOK
            iduliar disorders                             MEDICAL
                                                          PUDLISHERS
occlusion   Occlusion            RAM I JORD        1966   W.B.SAUNDE
                                                          RS COMPANY
occlusion   Occlusion            HAMISH            1975   WRIGUL
                                 THOMSON
occlusion   An introduction ASH&RAMFJORD           1982   W.B.SAUNDE
            to       functional                           RS COMPANY
            occlusion
occlusion   Science         and CHARLES            1997   TUINTESSEN
            practice          of MCNEILL                  CE BOOKS
            occlusion
occlusion   Occlusion         in HAISH             1980   WRIGHI
            clinical practice    THOWWSON
occlusion   Monagement of JEFFREY                  1998   MOSBY
            temporo              P.OKESON
            maudibular
            disorders       and
            occlusion
occlusion   Curreul treatment LEVINE               1986   W.B.
            in dental practice                            SAUNDERS
                                                          COMPANY
occlusion   Mastication          D.J.ANDERSON      1976   WRIGHT
                                 B.MATTHEWS
occlusion   Occlusion            JOSE DOSANTOS     2007   QUINTESSEN
            principles     the                            CE
                          atment
       occlusion          Occlusion     and IVEN KLINEBERG     2005      WRIGHT
                          chinical practice
                          an      evidence-
                          based approoch




       Basic sciences

Area         Title                            Author           Year         Publisher
Basic        Principles of biotechnology      Dr . A.J.NAIR    First        Laxmi publications (p)
sciences                                                       edition      LTD
                                                               2007
Basic        Atlas of medical helminthology   P.L.Chiodini     2001         Churchill Livingstone
sciences     and protozoology
Basic        Essential Cell Biology           Alberts          Third        Garland Science
sciences                                      Bray             edition
Basic        Longman’s Medical                T.W.Sadler       2006         Lippincott Williams
sciences     Embryology                                                     &Wilkins
Basic        Medical Embryology               T.W.Sadler       2010         Wolters Kluwer
sciences
Basic        Oral Facial Genetics             Ray E.Stewart    1976         C.V.Mosby Company
sciences
Basic        Physiology and Biophysics ш      Ruch - Patton    1973         W.B.Saunders Company
sciences
Basic        Abrégé de biophysique            Guy Bouchier     1982         Masson
sciences     adontologique
Basic        Forensic Dentistry (Atlas)       P.K.Whittakes    1989         Wolfe Publishing LTD
sciences
Basic        Forensic Dentistry               F.M.Cameron      1974         Churchill Livingstone
sciences
Basic        Dental Identification            Warren           1976         Henry Kintton Publishes
sciences     Forensic Deontology              Harvey
Basic        Introduction to                  David Hyde       2009         Mc Graw - Hill
sciences     Genetic Principals
Basic        HIV and Dementia                 M.B.A.Oldstone   1995         Springer
sciences
Basic        Immunology                       Thao Doan        2008         Lippincott Williams
sciences                                      Roger Melvold                 &Wilkins
Basic      Basic Immunology                Abul.Alabas           2001   W.B.Saunders Company
sciences
Basic      Lippincott’s illustrated        Richard A.Harvey      2007   Philadelphia
sciences   Reviews Microbiology
Basic      Lippincott’s illustrated        William A.Strohl      2001   Philadelphia
sciences   Reviews Microbiology
Basic      Medical Microbiology            Geo.F.Brooks          2004   Boston
sciences
Basic      Microbiology for dentistry      Lalashman             2007   Churchill Livingstone
sciences
Basic      Microbiology A systems          Cowan Talaro          2009   Boston
sciences   Approach
Basic      Foundation in Microbiology      Kathleen Park         2008   ---
sciences   Basic Principles                Talaroo
Basic      Clinical Chemistry              Michael L.Bishop      2010   Wolters Kluwer
sciences
Basic      Principles of Biochemistry      Dr.B.S.Chauhan        2008   University science Press
sciences   and Biophysics
Basic      Textbook OF Biochemistry        Harbans Lab           2008   India Binding House,
sciences   for Dental Students                                          Noida (up)
Basic      Biochemistry for                DM Vasude van         2007   Jay Pee
sciences   Dental Students                  Sreekumari S
Basic      Biochemistry                    James.M.PH.D.Orten    1970   The C.V. Mosby
sciences                                                                Company
Basic      Biochemistry illustrated        Peter.N.Campbell      2000   Churchill Livingstone
sciences
Basic      Harper’s Biochemistry           Robert K.Murray       2000   Mc Graw - Hill
sciences
Basic      Harper’s illustrated            Robert K.Murray       2003   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences   Biochemistry                                                 Company
Basic      Biochemistry                    Pamela C.Champe       2008   Wolters Kluwer
sciences                                   Richard A.Harvery
Basic      Aide Memaire de Biochime        J.P.Leronx            1976   Flammarian Medecine -
sciences   (French)                                                     Sciences
Basic      Multiple Choice Questions On    L.G.Whitby            1981   Blackwell Scientific
sciences   Clinical Chemistry                                           Publications
Basic      Dental Biochemistry             Eugene.P.Lazzari      1968   Philadelphia
sciences
Basic      Dental Biochemistry             Eugene.P.Lazzari      1976   Leo and febiger
sciences
Basic      Biosyntheses Des Proteines      Francois Chaperille   1974   Hermman Collection
sciences                                                                Methodes
Basic      Manual of Dental Therapeutics   Raymond F.Zambito     1991   Mosby Year Book
sciences
Basic      Antibiotiques                   Jean Assglineauet     1973   Hermann
sciences                                  Jean - Pierrezalta
Basic      Abrégé de Pharmacologie        P.Lechat              1978    Masson
sciences   medical
Basic      Principles of Dental           Nuresh Kumur          2005    Satish Kumur
sciences   Pharmacology                   Khanna
Basic      Applied Pharmacology for the   Elena Balenis         2007    An imprint of
sciences   Dental Hygienist               Haveles                       Elsevierinc
Basic      Clinical Pharmacology in       Sam V.Holroyd         1988    Mosby Company ,
sciences   Dental Practice                                              D.C.Toronto
Basic      Clinical Chemistry and         Martin- A- Crook      2006    Hodder Arnold
sciences   Metabolic medicine
Basic      Clinical Pharmacology in       Sam V.Holroyd         1974    The C.V. Mosby
sciences   Dental Practice                                              Company
Basic      Drug Abuse in the              Gabriel G. Naha       1981    Robert Maxwell,M.C
sciences   Modern World                   Henry Clay Frick ll
Basic      Clinical Pharmacology for      Sebastian G.C.Ancio   1989    Year Book Medical
sciences   Dental Professionals
Basic      Adverse Drug Reactions in      R.A.Seymon            1996    Oxford University Press
sciences   Dentistry                      J.G.Meechan
Basic      Clinical Pharmacology in       Sam V.Holroyd         1978    The C.V. Mosby
sciences   Dental Practice                                              Company
Basic      Applied Pharmacology for the   -----                 1995    Mosby
sciences   Dental Hygienist
Basic      Pharmacology for               Fred F. Cowan         1978    Lea and Febiger
sciences   the Dental Hygienist
Basic      Antibiotic Use in              -----                 1984    Quintessence Publishing
sciences   Dental Practice
Basic      Drug in Dentistry              L.W.Kay               1972    John Wright and Sons
sciences                                                                Ltd
Basic      Dental Drug Reference          Gezat .Terezhalm      2006    Lippin Cott Williams
sciences   with Clinical implication
Basic      Dental Pharmacology            George                1980    Blackwell Scientific
sciences                                  W.Pennington                  Publications
Basic      Basic science                  Richard L.Wynn        2003    Lexi Comp
sciences
Basic      Dental Drug Reference          Tommy. W.Gage         1999    Mosby
sciences
Basic      Dental Drug Reference          Tommy. W.Gage         1994    George Stamathis
sciences
Basic      Lecture Notes on Drugs         T.J.Wikim &           -----   Blackwell Scientific
sciences    for Dental Students           P.N.Davidson                  Publications
Basic      Dental Drug Reference          --------              -----   Frieda Atherton Pickett
sciences   with Clinical implication
Basic      Pharmacology & Therapeutics    John A.Yagiela        2004    Elsevier Mosby
sciences   for Dentistry
Basic      Principles of Dental           Naresh Kumar          2005    CBS Publishers
sciences   Pharmacology                     Khanna
Basic      Principles of Pharmacology       David E.Golan       2008   Wolter Kluwer
sciences                                                               Lippincott Williams&
                                                                       Willkins
Basic      Pharmacology (Lippincott’s       Richard D.Howland   2006   Lippincott Williams &
sciences   illustrated Reviews)                                        Willkins
Basic      Handbuch der experimentellen     Frank A.Smith       1970   Springer-Verlageberlin
sciences   pharmakologie experimentel
           pharmacology
Basic      Antibiotic & Antimicrobial use   Michael G.Newman    2001   Quintessence Books
sciences   in Dental Practice
Basic      Manual of Antibiotics &          John E.Conten       2002   Lippincott Williams&
sciences   Infections                                                  Willkins
Basic      Dental Pharmacology              George              1969   Oxford & edinburgh
sciences                                    W.Pennington
Basic      Medical Pharmacology             Andres Goth         1976   Mosby
sciences   Principles & concepts
Basic      Pharmacology & therapeutics      Enid A.Neidle       1985   Mosby
sciences   for Dentistry
Basic      Mechanisms of                    P.F.D’Arcy          1996   Springer
sciences    drug interactions
Basic      Abrégé de Pharmacologie          H.Dechy             1983   Masson
sciences   Odontologique
Basic      Abrégé de Pharmacologie          H.Dechy             1976   Masson
sciences   Odontologique
Basic      Dental therapeutic Digest        ----                1995   Syntex Puertorico
sciences
Basic      Oxford Handbook of               ----                1998   Oxford Univ. Press
sciences    Dental Patient Care                                        C .Scully
Basic      Scientific Foundations           Bertran Cohen       1976   William Heinemann
sciences   of Dentistry                                                Medical Books Limited
Basic      Molecular Basis of               Gerald M.Faller     1989   Appleton & Lauge
sciences    Medical Cell Biology
Basic      Biochemistry and Oral Biology    C.P.Geary           1977   Bristol John Wrght &
sciences                                    M.L.Hayes                  sons LTD
                                            A.C.Smillie
Basic      Developmental                    Harold C.Slavkin    1979   ------
sciences   craniofacial Biology
Basic      Human Biology                    Sylvia S. Mocler    2004   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Essentials of Biology            Sylvia S. Mocler    2007   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Biology                          Sylvia S. Mocler    2007   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Photo Atlas for General Biology Dennis Strete        2007   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Essentials of Oral Biology , Oral Anatomy   Dr. Maji jose           2008      Swastik Packagings
           , Histology, Physiology, & Embryology
sciences
Basic      Molecular Biology ,Principles               Dr. Priyonda Siwach     2007      Bangalore
sciences   and Practices
Basic      Oro Facial Pain                             Renyde leeuw            2008      Quintessence Publishing
sciences
Basic      Anatomy and Physiology in                   Anre Waugh              2007      Churchill Living Tone
sciences   Health and illness
Basic      The Physiology of The Mouth                 G-Neil Jenkins          1960      Blackwell Scientific
sciences                                                                                 Publications
Basic      Oral Physiology and Occlusion               James H. Perryman       1978      Pergaman
sciences
Basic      Dental Anatomy, Physiology,                 Major M. Ash, Jr.,      1984      Saunders
sciences   and Occlusion                               B.S, D.D.S., M.S, Dr.
                                                       h. c.
Basic      Textbook of Medical                         W.B. Saunders           1980      Guyton
sciences   Physiology
Basic      Textbook of Medical                         Guyton and Hall         2006      Elsevier Saunders
sciences   Physiology
Basic      Clinical Oral Physiology                    Tirothy S.Miks          2004      Qb Quintessence books
sciences                                               Birgitte Naunlofte
                                                       Peter Svensson
Basic      Programs of The Brain                       J.Z.Yang                1978      Oxford University Press
sciences
Basic      Fundamentals of Physiology                  Stuart Ira Fox          2009      Mc Graw – Hill
sciences                                                                                 Higher Education
Basic      Human Anatomy and                           David Shier, Jackie     2004      Mc Graw – Hill
sciences   Physiology                                  Butler, Ricki Lewis               Higher Education /
                                                                                         Martin J.Lange
Basic      Physiology Practical Manual                 Raj Kapar               Reprint   CBS
sciences   for Dental Students                                                 2009
Basic      Elements de Physiologie                     J.Malmejacd             1976      Mmarian
sciences
Basic      Précis de Physiologie                       ------                  1976      Masson
sciences
Basic      Précis de Physiologie                       ------                  1979      Masson
sciences
Basic      Précis de Physiologie                       H.H                     1975      Masson
sciences
Basic      Précis de Physiologie                       H.Hermann               1976      Masson
sciences                                               J.F.Gier
Basic      Applied Physiology of The                   Christopher             1975      John Wright and Linited
sciences   Mouth                                       ,L.B.Lavelle
Basic      Dental and Oral Anatomy,                    Satish Chandra          2004      Medical Publishers
sciences   Physiology, and Occlusion
Basic      Oro Facial Pain and Head Ache   Barry J.Sessle         2006        Yair Sharav
sciences                                                                      Rafael Benoliel
Basic      Physiology Practical Manual     Raj Kapoor             2004        Satish Kumer Jain
sciences
Basic      Medical Physiology              Sujh K.Chaudhuri       2009        New Central Book
sciences                                                                      Agency(p) LTD
Basic      Dental Anatomy, Physiology,     Wheeler’s eu           1992        W.B.Saunders
sciences   and Occlusion                   C. (Russell charlos)
Basic      Dental Anatomy, Physiology,     Major M. Ash           2003        Elsevier Science
sciences   and Occlusion                   Stanley D. Nelson
Basic      Physiological Basis             John B.West            1990        Williams and Willkins
sciences   of Medical Practice
Basic      Abrégé de Pharmacologie         A.Woda                 1983        Masson
sciences    Oro- Facial
Basic      Human Physiology                Ardrew David           2001        Churchill Livingstone
sciences
Basic      An introduction to .C.         J.H. Green              1976        Oxford University
sciences   Human Physiology
Basic      Textbook of Medical            Guyton and Hall         2000        Saunders
sciences   Physiology
Basic      Concepts in Medical Physiology Julian Seifter          2005        Lippincott Williams &
sciences                                  Austin Ratner                       Willkins
                                          David Sloane
Basic      Review of Medical Physiology   William .F. Ganongt     2005        Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Textbook of Medical             Arthur .C. Guyton,     1991        W.B.Saunders
sciences   Physiology                      M.D
Basic      Human Physiology and            Arthur .C. Guyton      1971-1997   Saunders
sciences   Mechanisms of Disease
Basic      Physiology                      Robert.M.Berne         2004        Mosby
sciences                                   Matthew N.Levy
Basic      Physiologie, Appliquée,         Samson Wright          1973        Oxford University Press
sciences    A LA Médecine
Basic      Illustrated Handbook            C.T.Kirkpotrick        1992        Jhon Wiley & Sons
sciences    of Medical Physiology
Basic      Berne & Levy Physiology         Bruce M. Koeppen       1983-2008   Mosby elsevier
sciences
Basic      Essentials of Oral Physiology   Robert.M.Bradley       1995        Mosby – Year book
sciences
Basic      Physiologie Vegetale,           Paal Mazliak           1974        Hermann
sciences   Natrition, ET Metabolisme
Basic      Human Physiology                Sturat Ira Fox         2006        Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Medical Physiology              Walter F. Boron        2009        A student Consult Title
sciences                                   Emile L. Boulpaep                  Saunders
Basic      Essentials of Medical           K sem Bulingam         2010        Jaypee
sciences   Physiology                      Premasem Bulingam
Basic      Path physiology                 Carol Mattson Porth   2009   Wolters Kluw
sciences
Basic      Physiological Basis             Best and Taylors      1985   ---
sciences   of Medical Practice
Basic      The Physiological Basis         Charles H. Best       1961   The Williams and
sciences   of Medical Practice             Norman B. Taylor             Wilkins Company
Basic      Human Physiology (The           Raff                  2006   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences   Mechanisms of Body Function)
Basic      Human Physiology                Vander                2001   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Principles of Anatomy           Philip Tate           2009   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences   and Physiology                                               Higher Education
Basic      Hole’s Essentials of Human      Davidshirs            2003   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences   Anatomy and Physiology
Basic      Medical Physiology              Walter F. Boron       2003   Elsevier Science
sciences
Basic      Human Physiology                Laurake Sherwood      2007   ---
sciences   from Cells to Systems
Basic      Essentials of Physiology        J.F. Lamb             1991   Blackwell
sciences                                   C.G. Ingram
Basic      Review of Medical Physiology    William F. Ganouy     2003   Mc Graw – Hill
sciences
Basic      Physiologie Humaine             Philippe Meter        1977   Flammarion Mede
sciences                                                                Cine - Sciences
Basic      Textbook of Human Physiology    Indu Khurana          2001   Elsevier
sciences   For Dental Students
Basic      Path physiology                 Ivan Damjanov         2009   Saunders
sciences
Basic      The Physiology of Bone          Janet M.Vaughan       1970   Oxford University
sciences
Basic      Textbook of Pain                Pramod Kumar          2002   CBS Publishers and
sciences                                                                Distributor
Basic      Path physiology                 Elizabeth Rosto       2008   Judith A schilling
sciences                                                                McCann
Basic      Understanding Path physiology   Huether               2008   Mosby
sciences
Basic      Physiologie histoique           Charles Kaysper       1970   Vaugira rol
sciences    fonctions denutrition
Basic      Textbook of physiology          HC Tandan             2005   HC Tandan,
sciences   For Dental Students                                          R.Chandramouli
Basic      Physiologie, Systeme            Charles Kaysper       1976   Flammarion
sciences   nerveux muscle
Basic      Physiologie medicale            W.F. Ganong           1977   Masson
sciences
Basic      Flavor Perception               Andrew J. Taylor      2004   Blackwell
sciences                                    Deborob D. Roberts
Basic      Oral Physiology and Occlusion    James H. Perryman    1978   Pergaman
sciences
Basic      The Physiology of                H. Dubrul            1981   Qb (quin tessence
sciences    Oral Reconstruction             A. Menekratis               books)
Basic      Physiologie Du Systeme           G. Morin             1974   Masson ET Cie
sciences   nerveux central
Basic      The Physiology and               G. Neel Jenkins      1978   Blackwell Scientific
sciences   Biochemistry of the Mouth                                    Publications
Basic      Synopsis of Physiology           C.C.N. Vass          -      John Wright
sciences
Basic      NeuroPhysiologie fonctionnelle   Buser Pierre         1975   Hermann
sciences
Basic      Embryologie et developpement     Masson               1964   Printed in France
sciences   bucco-Facial
Basic      Embryologie et developpement     Professeur Fevre     1964   By Masson et Cie and
sciences   bucco-Facial                                                 Julien PreLat
Basic      Elements de Biophysique          F. Gremy             1977   Vangirard
sciences
Basic      Elements de Biophysique          F. Gremy             1977   Vangirard
sciences
Basic      Human Physiology                 Stuart Ira Fox       -      Higher Education
sciences
 Area             Title                         Author                Year     Publisher
 Removable        An Atlas of removable         quintessence          1988     Russell j.strattar
 prosthesis       partial denture design
 Removable        Design of the partial         analra                2008     Jose luis Garcia micheelsen
 prosthesis       removable denture
 Removable        Prosthodontic Treatment       Mosby                 2004     Georoje A. Zarb
 prosthesis       for Edentulous patients
 Removable        Immediate          complete   quintessence          2008     Michel ponpignoli
 prosthesis       dentures
 Removable        Tesctbaoh of removable        CBS                   2009     Shorad gupt
 prosthesis       partial prosthodonties
 Removable        Prasthodontics for the        Ejvrnd Bidtg          1999     puintessence
 prosthesis       Elderly
 Removable        Principles and practices of   Euao Hogaheaura       2001     puintessence
 prosthesis       conplete Denturea
 Removable        Prosthodontic in clinicol     Rabert S.Klugnan      2008     informa
 prosthesis       proctice
 Removable        The complete denture –        Michael L.Macentee    1999     Q uintessence
 prosthesis       Aclinical pthurasj




Area                        Title          Author                    Year    Publisher
Removable prosthesis        Laboratory     Derek stananought         1978    Blackwell
                            procedures for                                   scientific
                            partial & full                                   publication
                            denture
Removable prosthesis        Full denture   John Farrell              1976    Henry      kimpton
                                                                             publishers
Removable prosthesis        Removable           John f.bater         1991    wright
                            denture
                            construction
Removable prosthesis   Partial denture    William l.mclrackem   1964   The     c.v.mosby
                       construction                                    company
Removable prosthesis   Partique de la     g.soyer               1970   Maloine       s.a.
                       prothese                                        editous
                       decollete'e
Removable prosthesis   Complete           d.j.neill             1975   Wright
                       denture
                       prosthetics
Removable prosthesis   Complete           d.j.neill             1983   Wright
                       denture
                       prosthetics
Removable prosthesis   Sectional          e.pollen warner       1978   Wright
                       dentures
Removable prosthesis   Removable          John f.bater          1978   Wright
                       partial denture
                       construction
Removable prosthesis   Complete           Robert p.reppez       1981   Masson publishing
                       denture                                         usa
Removable prosthesis   Partial denture    Robert a.katren       1987   Lohiyaku       euro
                       design                                          American
Removable prosthesis   Prosthodontics     Benyt owall           1996   Mosby-wolfe
Removable prosthesis   Prothese           j.lejoyeux            1979   Maloin s.a.editors
                       complete
Removable prosthesis   Prothese           j.lejoyeux            1976   Maloin s.a.editors
                       complete
Removable prosthesis   Prothese           j.lejoyeux            1978   Maloin s.a.editors
                       complete
Removable prosthesis   Prothese           j.lejoyeux            1964   Maloin s.a.editors
                       complete
Removable prosthesis   Prothese           j.lejoyeux            1971   Maloin s.a.editors
                       complete
Removable prosthesis   Prothese           j.lejoyeux            1971   Maloin s.a.editors
                       complete
Removable prosthesis   Overdenture in     r.m.barker            1988   British     dental
                       general practice                                association
Removable prosthesis   Techniques for     Michio haga           1990   Lohiyaku     euro
                       porcelain                                       American
                       laminate
                       veneers
Removable prosthesis   Occlusal           Toshio hosoi          1995   Lohiyaku       euro
                       registration for                                American
                       edentulous
                       patients
Removable prosthesis   Treatment          Toshihiro hirai       1995   Lohiyaku       euro
                       dentures     for                                American
                       edontolous
                       prosthodontic
Removable prosthesis   Core buildurs     Shunji fukurhima    1995   Lohiyaku     euro
                                                                    American
Removable prosthesis   Removable         j.d.walter          1990   British     dental
                       partial denture                              association
                       design
Removable prosthesis   Full dentures     Alan mach           1978   Wright
Removable prosthesis   Boucher's         Judson c.hickey     1980   The     c.v.mosby
                       prosthodontic                                company
                       treatmaent for
                       edontolous
                       patients
Removable prosthesis   Prosthetic        Giulio preti        2008   quintessence
                       rehabilitation
Removable prosthesis   Mclracher's       Alan b.care         2005   Elsevier mosby
                       removable
                       partial
                       prosthodntics
Removable prosthesis   Partial denture   Lois g.terkla       1963   c.v.mosby
Removable prosthesis   The braremask     Tomas abbrektsson   1989   quintessence
                       osseointegrated
                       implant
Removable prosthesis   Swenson's         Carl o.bouches      1964   c.v.mosby
                       complete
                       denture
Area         Title                         Author               Year   Publisher
Removable    An Atlas of removable         quintessence         1988   Russell j.strattar
prosthesis   partial denture design
Removable    Design of the partial         analra               2008   Jose luis Garcia micheelsen
prosthesis   removable denture
Removable    Prosthodontic Treatment       Mosby                2004   Georoje A. Zarb
prosthesis   for Edentulous patients
Removable    Immediate          complete   quintessence         2008   Michel ponpignoli
prosthesis   dentures
Removable    Tesctbaoh of removable        CBS                  2009   Shorad gupt
prosthesis   partial prosthodonties
Removable    Prasthodontics for the        Ejvrnd Bidtg         1999   puintessence
prosthesis   Elderly
Removable    Principles and practices of   Euao Hogaheaura      2001   Puintessence
prosthesis   conplete Denturea
Removable    Prosthodontic in clinicol     Rabert S.Klugnan     2008   informa
prosthesis   proctice
Removable    The complete denture –        Michael L.Macentee   1999   Q uintessence
prosthesis   Aclinical pthurasj


Removable    Impressions of edentulous Nagao-Suzuki             1993   United states of America
prosthesis   patients
Removable    Prosthodontic      treatment Zarn-Bergman          1978   Mosby
prosthesis   for      partiallyedentulous
             Patients
Removable    Occlusal Registration (5)    To sgio,Hosoi         1995   Ishiyaku Auro Americxa
prosthesis
Removable    Precision      attachment James.Baker              1981   Mosby
prosthesis   removable partial denture
Removable    Full Dentures             Alan Mack                1987   John wright&sons LTD
prosthesis
Removable    Techniquer              de    L. Roucoules         1979   Maloine S.A.
prosthesis   construction des systemer
             inamovibles it compositer
             en prothese dentaire
Removable    Complete           Denture    JohnJ.Sharwy         1974   Ms Grawe-Hill
prosthesis   prosthodnticy
Removable    Surgical Atlas of Dental      Charler A.Babbush    1980   W.B.Saunders
prosthesis   Implant Tecgriquer
Removable    Treatment of Edentulouyr      J.Faser Mcord        2004   Churchill liringstone
prosthesis   patientr
Removable           Implant Ovrerdenrdentures     Jocelynes.Feine        2003   Qwintessenence
prosthesisImplant   for Edentulous patientr
Removable           Esthetic color Training in    Rade .D Parairina      2004   Elsesirier Mosby
prosthesis          Dentistry
Removable           Mising Teeth (Aguide to       J-Fraser M cord        2003   Churchill lisringstone
prosthesis          treatment options)
Removable           Llinical problem sohring      Dasrid W.Bartlett      2004   Churchill Livingstone
prosthesis          in prosthodontics
Removable           Complete           Dentures   Hugh Devlin            2002   Springer
prosthesis          (Achinial manual por the
                    Generul Dental practitiong
Removable           Kawabe       s     complete   Seyi kauerbe           2000   Medico      Dental   Media
prosthesis          Denturer                                                    Intermtionl
Removable           Essentialr of comrlete        Sheldon Winhker        1994   Ishiyahu Euro America,nc
prosthesis          denture prsthodontics
Removable           The          conical-crourn   Ahihiho shila          1993   Ishiyaku Euro Ameicdlne
prosthesis          Telescopic       removable
                    peruiodontic prosthesis
Removable           Maxillafacial Prosthetices                           1971
prosthesis          Maltidisci linary Practice
Removable           Mouth Rchabilitation          Maxlcomfeld                   C.V.Mosby
prosthesis
Removable         Stenrart's           Clinicl    Rodney.D. Phoenisc     2003   Quimtesience
prosthesisImplant Removablle           Partial
                  Prosthodonties
Removable         Textbook                  of    Deepah Nallasswamy     2007   Jaypee Brothers Medical
prosthesis        Prosthodontics
Removable         Raniofacial      Prostheser     Per-Ingvar Branemarh   1997   Quintessesce
prosthesis        Anaplastology           and
                  Osseointegration
Removable         Advanced       Removrable       James S. Brwdvrih      1999   Quintessence
prosthesis        Partial Dentures
Removable         Clinical      Maxillofacial     Thomas D. Taylor       2000   Quintessence
prosthesis        Prosthetics
Removable         Maxillofacial                   John Beumer            1996   Ishiyahll Euro America
prosthesis        Rehabilitation
                  Prosthodondontic        and
                  Surgical consideration
Removable         Mecanique biomecanique          L.Roucoles             1972   Maloinc s.a.editeur
prosthesis        et prostheses dentairer
Removable         Traitement de l edentation      J.l.esoyeux            1978   Maloine s.d.edliteur
prosthesis        totale jannee
Removable         Atlas of Removable Partial      L A Weinberg           1979   Mosby's
prosthesis        Denture Prosthodontics
Removable         Designing         Complete      D Watt                 1976   Saunders
prosthesis        Dentures
Removable    Maxillofacial Prosthetics   W Lancy            1979   P S G Pub. Comp.
prosthesis
Removable    Restauration Prothetique J Lejoyeux            1973   Maloine S A
prosthesis   Amovible de l;Edentation
             Partielle
Removable    The Neutral Zone in V Beresim                  1978   Mosby's
prosthesis   Complete and partial
             dentures
Removable    Removable Closure of the A Gaermy              1972   Buch und Zeitchriftenvereag
prosthesis   Interdental Space
Removable    Color Altar of dental George                   1988   Georg thieme verlag
prosthesis   Medicine       2Remorable
             Partial Dentures
Removable    Color Atlas of dental AlbredH.                 1993   Thieme Medical publishers
prosthesis   medicine complete denture Geering
             and over denture
Removable    McCrachen s Removable Glen P.mcGivneg          1995   Mosbg
prosthesis   partial prosthodontics
Removable    Prothese          Adjointe Gug Collet          1988   Editions C.N.P.M.D
prosthesis   complete une technioue un
             traitement
Removable    Esthetics in Dentistruj      Ronald E.         1976   J.B.L ippincott companj
prosthesis                                Goldstein
Removable    Clinical remvablo partial Nenneth L.           1992   Lahigahu E uro Aneriea
prosthesis   prosthodontics               Steurart
Removable    Mascillofacial rhabilitation John.Beumer TTT   1979   c.v. Mosby company
prosthesis   prosthodontic and surgical
             considerations
Removable    Compete           anchored Jack buchman        1974   J.B.Lippinicotl compausy
prosthesis   denturer
Removable    Acolour       atlas       of J.C.Davenport     1988   Wolfte edical publications
prosthesis   removable partial denturer
Removable    The Bar-Join danture         Eugene.J.Dolder   1978   Quintessence
prosthesis
Removable    Dental technology theory Richard W.Blakeslee   1980   C.V Mosby
prosthesis   and nractice
Removable    Overdentures Made easy Harold W. prioish'el    1997   Quintessence
prosthesis   aguide to implant and root
             supported prostheses
Removable    Gerodontology              Iam Barnes          1994   Wright
prosthesis
Removable    Traitement de.l'edentation Pedro saigar          1976   Julion prelat.editeurz
prosthesis   totale elementr pratiaues
Removable    Obturators&prostheses for A.c. roberts           1970   E&S livingstone ltd.
prosthesis   Cleft palate
Removable    La prothe're partielle     Frederico singen      1974   Buch und zeitrhriften
prosthesis
Removable    Designing partial dentures     David m.watt      1984   Wright
prosthesis
Removable    Kawabe's        complete   Seiji kawabe          1992   Ishyahu euro america.inc
prosthesis   dentures
Removable    Essentials of removable o.applw gate             1965   w.b.saunders company
prosthesis   partial denture prosthesis
Removable    La prothe'se decolettee    h.batarec             1969   Maloine s.a.
prosthesis
Removable    Removable            partial   Joseph e.grasso   1991   Mosby
prosthesis   prosthodontics
Removable    Prothese            dentaire   j.rouot           1973   Masson e&c editors
prosthesis   squelletique
Removable    Immediate & replacement        John n.anderson   1981   Blackwell           scientific
prosthesis   denture                                                 publication
Removable    Immediate & replacement        John n.anderson   1973   Blackwell           scientific
prosthesis   denture                                                 publication
Removable    An atlas of complete           Jack m.bukhman    1970   j.p.lippincott company
prosthesis   denture prosthesis
Removable    Oral rehabilitation            Sumiya hobo       1997   Quintessence
prosthesis
Removable    Removable partial denture Christian besimo       1998   Quintessence
prosthesis   on          osseointegrated
             imp;ants
Removable    Removable            partial Ernest l.miller     1972   The willim&wilkins co.
prosthesis   prosthodontics
Removable    Dental treatment of elderly j.f.bateo            1984   Wright
prosthesis
Removable    Partial          removable f.kratochil           1988   w.b.saunders company
prosthesis   prosthodontics
Removable    Removable           denture a.a.grant            1992   Churchill livingstone
prosthesis   prosthodontics
Removable    partial denture prosthesis  d.j neill            1977   Blackwell       scientific
prosthesis                                                           publication
Removable    A colour atlas of complete j.a.hobbirth          1985   Wolfe medical publication
prosthesis   denture                                                 ltd.
Area         Title                        Author                  Year   Publisher

Dictionary   Hitti's     English-Arabic   Yusuf Hitti             1982   Librairie du Liban
             Medical Dictionary
Dictionary   Oxford         Wordpower     Oxford      University 2009    Oxford University Press
             English-English-Arabic       Press
Dictionary   The Unified Dictionary of    H Gezairy et al        2004    Librairie du Liban
             Dentistry English-Arabic
Dictionary   Glossary of Prosthodontics   M Khoury                1970   Syrian Dental Association
             Terms      English-Arabic-
             French
Dictionary   Almanhal      Dictionnaire   S Idriss                2007   Dar Aladab
             Francais-Arabe
Dictionary   Al-Muhit Oxford Study        M Badawi                1996   Academia International
             Dictionary English-Arabic
Dictionary   The Unified Dictionary of    M H Khayat et al        1983   Librairie du Liban
             Dentistry English-Arabic
Dictionary   Dictionary of Medical        Magalini and Magalini   1997   Lippincott-Raven
             Syndromes
Dictionary   Dictionary of Medical        M H Khayat et al        1974   Damascus University Press
             Sciences Arabic-French-
             English Part One
Dictionary   The       Glossary      of   M Alssadi               2010   Al-Quds (Medforall)
             Prosthodontic Terms
Dictionary   Al-Mawrid English Arabic     M Baalbaki              1969   Dar El-Ilm Lil-Malayen
             Dictionary
Dictionary   A Dictionary of Modern       M Cowan                 1980   Librairie du Liban
             Written Arabic Arabic-
             English
Dictionary   Al-Mughni         Al-Farid   H Karmi                 2000   Librairie du Liban
             English-Arabic
Dictionary   Nouveau           Larousse   Domart and Bourneuf     1981   Librairie Larousse
             Medical
Dictionary   Mosby's Dictionary of                                2006   Mosby Elsevier
             Medicine, Nursing and
             Health Professions
Dictionary   A Dictionary of Dentistry K Shihabi                  1994   Librairie du Liban
             English-Arabic
Dictionary   Stedman's          Medical                           2000   Lippincott Williams       and
             Dictionary                                                  Wilkins
Dictionary   Marashi's Grand Medical M O Marashi                  2003   Librairie du Liban
             Dicrtionary       English-
                  Arabic

Dictionary        Hitti's     New    Medical Y Hitti and A Al- 2008        Librairie du Liban
                  Dictionary English-Arabic Khatib
Dictionary        Illustrated      Stedman's                   1982        Lippincott Williams       and
                  Medical Dictionary                                       Wilkins
Dictionary        Webster's Seventh New                        1965        Merriam Company
                  Collegiate Dictionary
Dictionary        Mosby's Dental Dictionary C Babbush          2008        Mosby's

Dictionary        Stedman's          Medical                     2007      Lippincott   Williams     and
                  Dictionary for the Dental                                Wilkins
                  Professions
Dictionary        Oxford           Advanced A S Hornby           2005      Oxford University Press
                  Learner's Dictionary
Dictionary        Concise Illustrated Dental F J Harty           1994      Wright
                  Dictionary
Dictionary        Harty's Dental Dictionary Heasman          and 2007      Churchill Livingstone
                                             McCracken
Dictionary        Nouveau Petit Larousse                         1969      Librairie Larousse

Dictionary        Al-Qamous Al-Mouhit                            2005      Al Resalah

Dictionary        Dictionary of Medical M H Khayat et al         1974      Damascus University Press
                  Sciences Arabic-French-
                  English Part One
Dictionary        Abdel-Nour     Dictionaire                     2005      Dar El-Ilm Lil-Malayen
                  Arabe-Francais




             Area          Title           Author              Year     Publisher
             Radiology     Principles   of Lippincott Williams 2002     Olat Langland
            Dental imaging     &wilkens
Radiology   Dental             W.B.saunders           1980   Barr&Stephens
            Radiology
Radiology   Oral       and     Mosby                  1993   Allan G.Favnan
            maxilla ofacial
            Diagnostic
            imaging
Radiology   Dental             Saunders compuy        2000
            Radiograpy
Radiology   New Magnetic                              2004   Yuh-yuan shiay
            Applications
            inclinical                 Quintessence
            Dentistvy          publrs hingco
Radiology   Oral        hand   Lexi company           2003   J.Robent New land
            tissne diseases
Radiology   Panovamic          Lea &Febiger           1989   Olote.lang land
            Racliology
Radiology   La sers in         Quintessence co.tnc    1995   Leoj.miserendino
            Dentistry
Radiology   Laser therapy      Quintessence Editora 2006     Aldo       Brugnera
            applied       to   ltda                          Junior
            clinical
            Dentistyy
Radiology   Atlas of laser     Quintessence           2007   Donald J.coluzzi
            Applications in    Publishing
            Dentistry
Radiology   Radiology for      Lsevier mosby          2005   Herbert     H.former
            the       Dental                                 Jeanine J.stabulpos
            professional                                     lonagc
Radiology   Dental manife      Butter Worths          1973   Davil H.trapnell
            Stations of sys
            temic Disease
            Racliology in
            olinicol
            Diagnosis
            feries
Radiology   Radiation          C.V.Masby company 1960        A.H.Wuehrinann
            protection and
            Denbistry
Radiology   The complete       Michael pub lishing           R,M.goodlin D.D.S
            guide to Dental    co.Inc
            photography
Radiology   Aguide        to   Johu Wright and san 1977      Rita .Wasou
            dental             ltd
            Radiogrqply
Radiology   Coutemporary        Ounitesseuce Book   1996    Kunihito Miyashita
            cephalometric
            Radiograply
Radiology   Headant neck        Lippincott     Willi 2002   Anthanya.mancuso
            Radiology           amsand Wilkins              Ronalda-quisling
Radiology   Oral Radiology      Mosby                2000   Whibe
Radiology   Dental              Saunders             2006   Joen        lannucci
            Radiogroi phy                                   Haning
Radiology   Sconner             Cdp                 1989    Alain Lacan
            Dentaive
Radiology   Atlas of Dental     Mosby-Wolfe         1995    Rogen MBroWne
            and       Maxill
            ofacial
            Radiology and
            Imaging
Radiology   Dental radiolog     Oxford univev Sity 1997     Laetita Brock lebank
            under Standing      press
            the XRay Inage
Radiology   Maxillo facial      W.B.saunders        1990    Angelom.DSelbalson
            Imaging             compang
Radiology   Traite de radicd    Masson              1976    J.Metzger
            iagnostic
Radiology   Computer-           Elsevier   Aeademic 2005    Jahng.clement
            Graphic facial      press
            Reconsty
            uction
Radiology   Color Atlas of      Thieme              1991    Friedxich .pasler
            Dental
            Medicine
Radiology   Rxevcises      in   Aunders             381     Robert langlais
            oral radiology
            and
            interpretation
Radiology   Radiology for                           1996    Herbert Hfrommer
            dental
            ouxiliaries
Radiology   Fundamen tols       CBS                 2008    Vimal Ksikri
            of        dentol
            Radiology
Radiology   Radiographic        W.Baunders          1993    Joen Iannucci Haray
            interpret lation    compony
            for the dental
            hygienist
Radiology   Dentomayi iio       Japee       prothers 2000   Dk     Dayal lchris
            facial radiology    medical publishers          Naidoo
Radiology   Coupes series       Masson               1977   J:Gambarelli
                          du        corps
                          humain
            Radiology     Oral              W.B.Sannders              1985    Joseph A.G.Gibilisco
                          Radiogvaplic      company
                          Diagnosis
            Radiology     Oral     Roent    W.B.sdunders              1975
                          geno gradhic      company
                          Diagnosis



Area           Title                       Author                             Year    Publisher
Radiology      Elements     programmes  de Masson cie Editeures 120           1975    Iweill
               radiologie oto –rhino stomg
               tologigue
Radiology      Dental radiography          w.B.saunders company               1972    Obrien
Radiology      Dental Radiology            The c.v Mosby company              1977    Arthur
                                                                                      H.Wuehrma
                                                                                      nn
Radiology      Dental Radiology                   The c.v Mosby company       1973    Arthur
                                                                                      H.Wuehrma
                                                                                      nn
Radiology      Oral and Maxilbfacial Radiology W.B.S saunders co              1991    Dale
                                                                                      A.M:les
Radiology      Roent genogvaphic intertation      The C.V MosBy copany        1970    S.N.Bhaska
               for the dentist                                                        r
Radiology      Manuelde techniques Radiogra       Masson                      1977    G.Korach
               phrques Ducranc
Radiology      Radiology fordental Auxitiavies    The c.v.mosby company       1978    Herbert
Radiology      Radiology for dental auxiliaries   The c.v mosby co            1974    Herbert
                                                                                      h.frommer
Radiology      Oral roent genographic diagnosis W.B.saunderis company         1975    Stahne
                                                                                      yibilisco
Radiology      Oral roent genographic diagnosis W.B.saunderis company         1963    Stafne
Radiology      Radiographic Photography         Willian clowes and sans ltd           D.N       and
                                                                                      M.o
                                                                                      chemey
Radiology      An atlas of deutal and oral        John Wkight and Sons ltd            Syduey
               radiology                                                              Block man
Radiology      Essentials of dental radiography   Prentice-Hall Inc                   Wolh R.de
               for aeutal Assistauts and                                              lyre
               hygienists secoud edition
Radiology      xRay equipment for student         Black     well  scientilic          D.Noreen
               radiographers                      Publications                        chesney
Radiology      Oral Radiology                     Mosby                               Goaz White
Radiology      Exercises in oral Radiographic     W.B Savnders company       1985     Langlais
            interpretation                                                        and Kasle
Radiology   Atlas            Radiographique   masson                       1979   m.J.Kale
            DAnatomie dentaire
Radiology   Radiographic Imaging Forden       W.B.Saunders company         1989   Miles dale
            Tal AuXiliaries
Radiology   Principles and practice of        W.B.Sannders co              1982   Olafe lang
            punovamic Radiology                                                   land
Radiology   The radiology oral Examnotion     IGakn-Shoin                  1994   Richord
                                                                                  B.Rafal
Radiology   Oral Radiographic Diagnosis       Philadelphia lando toronto   1985   Giblisco
Radiology   Radiologie Dentaire               Julien prelat                1978   Wuehreman
                                                                                  n etmason
                                                                                  ting
Radiology   Dental radiology                  The c.v mosby compauy               Wuehmann
                                                                                  and manson
                                                                                  -hing
Radiology   Dental radiology                  loudon                              Wuehmann
                                                                                  and manson
                                                                                  -hing
Radiology   Radiographic Interpretation for   Mosby Company                1975
            The Dentist                                                           S.W.Bhaska
                                                                                  r
Radiology   Oral Roentgeno Graphic            W.B. Saunders Company        1958   Edward
            Diagnosis                                                             C.Stafne
Radiology   An Atlas Of Dental                W.B Saunders Company         1990   Myron J
            Radiographic Anatomy                                                  Kasle
Radiology   Oral Roentgen Ographic            W.B.Saunders Company         1969   Stafne-
            Diagnosis                                                             Edward
Radiology   Oral Roentgen Ographic            W.B.Saunders Company         1969   Stafne-
            Diagnosis                                                             Edward
Radiology   Oral Radiology                    Williams And Wilkins         1982   H.Guy Poy
                                                                                  Ton
Radiology   Encyclopedia Of Medical           Springer-Verlay Berlin       1970   L.Diethelm-
            Radiology                                                             O-Olsson
Radiology   Oral Radiology Principles And     The C.V. Mosby company       1982   Paulw
            Interpretation                                                        .Goas stuart
                                                                                  C.white
Radiology   X-Ray Physics And Equipment       Adtard and son, Dorking             F.Jaundrell.
                                                                                  Thampson
Radiology   Radiology Of The Skull And        C.V. Mosby comppany          1971   T.H.Newto
            Brain                                                                 n and
                                                                                  D.G.Potts
Radiology   Radiology Of The Skull And        Mosly                        1971   t.h.neu and
            Brain                                                                 DG.polts
Radiology   Intra –Oral Radiographic          W.B.Saunders Company                Langlais -
            Interrpetation                                                        Kasle
Radiology      Advanced Oral Radiographic         W.B.Saunders Company     1979   Robertp
               Interpvetation                                                     .langlais
Radiology      Radiographie Panovomque            Masson                   1977   p.laudenbac
               Dentaire                                                           h
Radiology      Anatomie Radiographic Massif       Masson                   1900   Murice
               Facial                                                             bouchet
Radiology      Atlas Of Oral Diagnostic           Ishigahin Euro America   1990   Tomomitsu
               Imaging                                                            higashi
Radiology      Oral Loser Application             Quintesseny              2006   F.Beer
Radiology      Magnetic Resonance of the          Thieme                   1990   E.polacios
               temporomondibylar Joint
Radiology      Digital and comrntional Dental     Quivtessence             2004   Irfau
               photography                                                        Ahmad
Radiology      Imaging in Esthetic Dentistry      Quivtessence             1998   Cary
                                                                                  E.goldstein
Radiology      Mastering      digital    dental Quivtessence               2006   Wolfgrang
               photography                                                        Bengl



            Pathology textbooks



Area           Title                           Author                      Year   Publisher
Pathology      Atlas of diffueult Diagnoses in W.B.S aunders company       1998   Barbaraf Athinson
               cylofathology
Pathology      Diagnostic surgical patholagy   Lippincott Willians         1999   Stephen
                                                                                  S.Sternlrrg
Pathology      Diagnostic surgical patholagy      Lippincolt Williams      1999   Stephen
                                                                                  S.sternlrrg
Pathology      Histology for patholoyy            Livpincott-Raven         1997   Stvhen
                                                                                  S.Sternlerg
Pathology      Neoplasms        With   Apocrine                            1998   Buis requena
               olifferentiation
Pathology      Atertbook of oral pathology      philadefia                 1983   William G.Shafer
Pathology      Pathology Illustrated            Churcbill Livingstone      1981   AlasdairD.T.Gova
                                                                                  n
Pathology      Tumars of the head and neck                                 1982   John Batsakis
Pathology      Aral Microlcology and Infectous    Willams &Wilkins         1978   GeorgeW.
               Disease                                                            Burnett
Pathology      O ral Microliology and Infctious   Willams &Wilkins         1983   Georges.
               Disease                                                            Schuster
Pathology      Clinical and oral Microlrolagy     oscford                  1984   Philip W.Ross
Pathology      Clinical and oral Microliology     Blackuells cientific     1984   Philip W.Ross
Pathology      Dental Microliology                Horper &Rou              1982   Jerryr.McG.hee
Pathology   Anatamie      patlalogique     de Maloine eoliteur               1977   Jean arther
            lavpareil masticateur     et des
            glandes salivraires
Pathology   General and oral patfology for Mosly                             1995   Riclord L.Miller
            the devtal Hygienist
Pathology   Acolour Atlas of oral cancers     Year      Book      Medical    1981   Arne burb haralt
                                              pullishers
Pathology   Alaboratory Manual for general Quintessence         publishing   1990   Dhigea eda
            and oral pathology                company
Pathology   Acolour Atlas of General Wolfe Mrdical publicatovs               1971   G.Austin
            Pathology                         LTD                                   G.resbam
Pathology   Color Atlas of oral Pathology     J.b.bippincott company         1983   Rolrrt colly
Pathology   Alaboratory       Manual       of Blachuell Scientific           1969   A.T.S umner
            Microtechique                 and
            Histochenistry
Pathology   Clinical Patbology of the oral Harfer Rou                        1978   Christofber
            Mucosa                                                                  L.B.lavelle
Pathology   Calor Atlas of pathology          J.b.lippingott company                V.S.navral
                                                                                    Medical school
Pathology   Color Atlas of oral patbology       Isliyaku Euro America        1987   Goro Ishilaua
Pathology   Acolour atlas of oral pahbology     Wolfe medical                1995   K.W.lee
Pathology   ColorAtlas of o ral Pathology       J.B.L ippincott Comany       1971   Rolert A.Colly
Pathology   Color Atlas of oral Pathology       J.B.L ippincott              1990   Hamilton      B.G
                                                                                    Rolisson
Pathology   Histalogie dentaire                 Masson                       1987   Monique triller
Pathology   Alrege Danatomo –Patbology          Masson                       1979   J.C.Kaqueler
            Dentaire
Pathology   Abregede pathologie dentaire        Masson                       1980   Z.Megl
Pathology   Essentials of pathaplysiology       Lippincott Williams          2007   Caral porth
Pathology   Oral cells and tissues              quintessence                 2003   Philias R.Grant
Pathology   Contemvorary o          ral   and   Mosly                        2004   J.Philiq Sa
            Maxillofcial pathology
Pathology   Essentials of oral pathology and    Sydney toranta               2008   R.A couson
            oral oral medicine
Pathology   Essentials of oral pathology and    Clurchill livingston         1998   R.A.Causon
            oral Medccine
Pathology   Ioachims lymph node pathology      Livpincott      williams      2002   Harry llooch im
                                               &wilbins
Pathology   Aral pathology                     Sounders                      2008   Linda duncan
Pathology   Knights Forensic pathology         Arnold                        2004   Peklca Sauklo
Pathology   Oral and maxillofocial pathology quitssnce                       2003   Robert E.marx
            ;arationale for Diagnosis and
            tratment
Pathology   Oral .Mascillofacial pathology     w.Bsaunders company           2002   Brad nerll
Pathology   Oral       pathology       clincal w.B.Saunders                  1999   Josph A.Regezi
            pathologic correlatiovs
Pathology   Oral pathalogy                    W.B.saunders             1989   Josefh regre
Pathology   Atlas of oral histology and LEA& Febiger                   1967   Garit bevrlander
            embryology
Pathology   The micro –organisms the S.K                               1973   Willougbby    D
            human mouth                                                       Millex
Pathology   Oral        mcrobvolgy        and W.B .sauders comqany     1988   Michel nenman
            mmunology
Pathology   Diagnostic histochemistry         Mosby gompamy            1970
Pathology   Self Assessment Marad 1           WIllIAM HEINEMANN        1978   Betamcohen
                                              MEDICAL
Pathology   Biopsy pathology of the oral Chapman hall medical          1998   E.W.odell
            tissues
Pathology   CLINICAL                  ORAL Wight                       1989   T.Wallcce
            MICROBIOLOGX                                                      macfudre
Pathology   Oral Microbiology ;urth basic mosly                        1982   Willam A.Nolte
            microbiology and immunology
Pathology   Oral anatomy Histology and mosly                           2002   B.K.B.lerkort
            enbryology
Pathology   Pocket Atlas of Hunan Histdogy Oxforduniversity            1980   Robet           t
            Robent Meadows                                                    MeadoWs
Pathology   Microliology in clnical Dentistry Boston                   1982   Frank Jorland
Pathology   Color Athas of Hunan oral Ishiyaku Euro america            1992   Hironori Kitamura
            Histology
Pathology   Oral Bialogy                      The C.V.moslry company   1981   Geral rath
Pathology   Lectue no tes on the use of the BlACK WELL                 1968   R.Boven
            Microcope
Pathology   Fine structure of the developing Rouger basel munchen      1977   Hubert
            epithelial of human teeth
Pathology   Atlas      Dhistologie    traause Masson                   1977   J.poirier
            pratiques
Pathology   Essentials of histology           Mosly                    1970   Cerrit Bevel ander
Pathology   Acolour the of haematological Educational our priced       1992   F.G.J.ha
            cytology                          Boolrs sheme
Pathology   Salivary gland tumors             Rergamon press           1982   Ludurla sikoroua
Pathology   Surgical patbology of the W.B. saunders                    1991   Garyl. ellis
            salivary gland
Pathology   Oral histology                    Mosby                    2008   Amtoniq nanci
Pathology   Ten cate s ral histology          Mosby                    2003   Antoniq nanci
Pathology   Oral histology                    Mosby                    1998   Richard tencat
Pathology   Primciples of patholgy fo Churchill lrngntone              1914
            lentedal
Pathology   Homoeopathie              odonto Mosby                     1978   R.G.M.lethuaine
            stamtolojie et dorleus
Pathology   Textbook of dental and oral Joypee brothers                2004   Statiah chandra
            histology with emlry
Pathology   Lal manial of ormal oral            Quintessence               2000   HollistonL.Rivier
            histology                                                             e
Pathology   Color athas of lasic histology      Lange medical Books       2003    Irurn lrman
Pathology   Theay      and      practicl   of   Denac.sheehan       .H.T. 1973    Shee han Denzac
            hitotechmoloyy                      mosly
Pathology   Essentials of oral Histology and    Mosby                     2006    James K.Anery
            Emlryology Aclinical Approack
Pathology   Functonal Histology                 Little Broun and company   1989   Myrin Bory senke
Pathology   Essential Haematology               OXFORD                     1993   A.V.Hofflraod
Pathology   Fundamentals of oral Histoy and     J.B.L ippincott comqamy    1972   D.V        incent
            Emlryology                                                            Provenza
Pathology   Manual of Histotogic Staoining      Mgron -hll                 1960   Lee G.luna
            Methods                                                        -68
Pathology   Atlas of Huma Histology             Lea & Feliger              1967   Mariano S.H. d
                                                                                  Fiore
Pathology   Adranced dental Histology           John Wright                1976   J.W oslorn
Pathology   Orbanis oral hintology and          Mosby                      1986
            emlryology
Pathology   Orlan s oral hiatology and          The C.V.mosly company      1980   S.N.Bhasker
            enleryology
Pathology   Hintologual        Hintochemial     Pergamon press             1990   J.A.Kiernan
            Methods Theory and practice
Pathology   Histological   techniques   for     Academic press             1964   Daniel c.pase
            electronMicroscopy
Pathology   Elements d histologie             Maloine        S.A.editeur 1973     Gerrit lerlander
                                              (mosby)
Pathology   Sandrittter Histopa thology (text B.C.Decker inc             1989     Thomas
            book and atlas)
Pathology   Hintopatholagle O.R.Let           Manon                      1976
Pathology   Histologle                        masson                     1976     Thomas S.leenon
Pathology   Ennential of oral histology and Mosby                        2000     James K.Arry
            enlryology
Pathology   Ennential of oral histology and Mosby                        1992     James K.Aury
            emlrylagg
Pathology   Illust uted Dental Embryoloby philodelphia                   1997
            Hstology Anatomy
Pathology   Contemporay oral Microliology Mosby                          1992     Jorgen Slots
            and immanology
Pathology   Color Athas of Histopathology     Harvey Miller              1995     R.C.C. urran
Pathology   Walter & Israel          Geveral Churchill Livingston        1996     J.B.walter
            pathology
Pathology   Histology Atert and Athas         Williams &wilkins          1989     Michael H.Ross
Pathology   Oral Devrlopment and Histology Williams                      1987     Dames K.Avery
Pathology   Cytopathology                     masly                      1997     Grace TMcKee
Pathology   Illustrated Dntal Emlryology     W.B.S aunders               1997   Mary Bath Balogh
            Histology and Anatomy
Pathology   Aekernian s surgical pathology   masly                       1996   Juan rosal
Pathology   Ackerm an s surgical pathology   masly                              Juan rosal
Pathology   Basic pathology                  W.B.saunders company        1992   Vinay Kumor
Pathology   Anderson s Pathology VoL1        bouis                       1990   John M.Kissane
Pathology   Anderson s Pathology VOL2        bouis                       1990   John M.Kissane
Pathology   Visual Histology                 lea                         1988   Dard T.Moran
Pathology   Wintrole s clinical Hematology   lea                         1993   G.richard lea
Pathology   Wintrole s clinical Hematology   lea                         1993   G.richard lea
Pathology   Odontogenic Tumovs And           Quintessence
            Allied Lesions
Pathology   Experimental Immunology          Macmillan Company           1987
Pathology   Immunology                       Gower Medical Publishing    1989   Ivan M.Roitt
Pathology   Clinical Immunology              Gower Medical Pubilsing     1991   Jonathan Brostoss
Pathology   Phatogenic Microbiology          C.V.mosby co.               1973   Burnet & Schuster
Pathology   Monographs In Clinical           S.Karger                    1969   John K.H rost
            Cytology Vol 2
Pathology   .Monographs On Atherosclerosis   S.Karger                    1969   Henry S.Simms
            Vol 1                                                               Oj Ponak
Pathology   Actinomy cosis                   John Wright & Sons          1969   Marcell Bronner
Pathology   Permar's Oral Embryology &       Lippincott William &        2000   Rudyc.Melfe
            Microscopic Anatomy              Wilkins
Pathology   Dental Morphology And            University Of Chicago       1971   Albert
            Evolution                        Press                              A.Dahlberg
Pathology   Actinomycosis                    John wright & Sons          1971   Marcell Bronner
Pathology   General And Systematic           Elsevier                    2004   J.C.E.Underwood
            Pathology
Pathology   Oral Pathology For The Dental    Aunders Company             1992   Ibsen
            Hygienist
Pathology   Cell Biology                     Elsevier Science            2004   Thomas
                                                                                D.Pollard.M.D
Pathology   Practical Haematology            Licensing Agency            2001   S.Mitchell Lewis
Pathology   Immunology                       Designs And Patents         2001   Ivan Roitt
Pathology   Atlas Of Hematology              Lippincott Williams And     2003   Shauna
                                             Wilkins                            C.Anderson
Pathology   Diagnostic Soft Tissue                                       2003   Markku Miettiner
            Pathology
Pathology   Color Atlas Of Dental Medicine   Thieme                      2000   Reichart A.Peter
Pathology   Soft Tissue Tumors               Mosby                       1995   Franz M.Enzinger
Pathology   Robbins Pathologic Basis Of      Philadelphia                1989   W.J.Arnold
            Disease
Pathology   Diseases Of The Head And Neck    Thieme Medical Publishers   1987   Johannes
                                                                                A.G.Rhodin
Pathology   An Atlas Of Histology            Oxford                      1975   Wayne M.Becker
Pathology       The World Of The Cell              Menlo Park               1996   Brad W.Neville
Pathology          Color Atlas Of Clinical Oral    Hong kong                1991     Jean Cascarigny
                Pathology
Pathology                         Homxotherapie                                    Anil Ghom
                    Preoperatoire en Odontologie
Pathology       Text Book Of Oral Pathology        Jospee                   2008   Maji Jose
Pathology       Manual Of Oral Histology&Oral       CBS Publishers          2009   Maji Jose
                Pathology (Colour Atlas And        &Distributors
                Text)
Pathology       Essentials Of Oral Biology(Oral    CBC Pulilesher           2008   Hery O.Trou
                Analomy ,Histology                 ,Distributors)                  Bridge
                ,Phijsiology,& Embryology)
Pathology       Inflammation                       Puintessence             1997   Ernest Newbrun

Pathology       Cariology                          Quintessence             1989   Brad W.Neville

Pathology       Color atlas Of Clinical Oral       Lippincott Williams &    1999   John Edeburgh
                Pathology                          Wilkins                         Norman

Pathology       Color atlas And Text Of The        Mosby                    1995
                Salivary Glands
Pathology       Oral Anatomy Histology And         London                   2009   B.K.B.Berkovitz
                Embryology
Pathology       Illustraited Dental Embryology ,   W.B Saunders Company     1997   Mary Bath-
                Histology, Anatomy                                                 Balogh
Area            Title                              Author                   Year   Publisher
Oral medicine   Burket's oral medicine             Mortin S. greenleerg     2008   BC deckers
Oral medicine   Manual of medicine for dental      B.A. Okastry             2009   CBS
                hygienist
Oral medicine   Medicine for dental students       S.N. Khosla              2006   CBS
Oral medicine   Urgent care in the dental office   Beza T. terezhalmy       1998   Quintessence
Oral medicine   Temporomandibular joint            Davied M. Laskin         2006   Quintessence
                disorders
Oral medicine   Dental hygiene theory and          Michele leonardi darby   1995   Saunderson
                practice                                                           company
Oral medicine   Color atlas of oral diseases       George Laskaris          1988   Thieme medical
                                                                                   Puplisher
Oral medicine   Dental hygiene: A review for the   Babara benson            1983   Quintessence
                national board examination
Oral medicine   Odontologie et stomatologie        Andreee chaput           1975   Expansion
                                                                                   scientifrq
                                                                                   francaise
Oral medicine   The oral manifestation of          Shklar MC. Carthy               Butterworths
                systemic disease
Oral medicine   Nizel-nutrition in clinical        Abraham E. Nizel                W.B. saunders
                dentistry                                                          company
Oral medicine   AIDS/ HIV in perspective           Barry D. schoub        1999   University press
Oral medicine   Clinical aspects of Aads and       M.S. staquent          1986   Oxford university
                Aids-related complex                                             press
Oral medicine   Orofacial pain                     Welden E. Bell                Year book
                                                                                 medical publisher
Oral medicine   Toothache and orofacial pain       J.M. Mumford                  Churchill
                                                                                 livingstone
Oral medicine   Manual of temporomandibular        Edward F. Wright              Blackwell
                disorders
Oral medicine   Themonth the face the mind         Charlotte Feinmann            Ox ford university
                                                                                 press
Oral medicine   Physiologie                        J.Tremolieres          1977   J.Tremolieres
Oral medicine   Oral dragnosis oral medicine and   Steven L .Bricker             Lea&Febiger
                treatment planning
Oral medicine   Disease of the oral mucosa a       Manfred strasbvryand   1972   Guintessenz
                color atlas
Oral medicine   Oral candidosis                    Larshman . P.                 Wriglt
                                                   Samaranayara
Oral medicine   Oral diagnossis                    W .R. Tyldesley        1978   Pergamon press5
Oral medicine   Oral Manifestations of systemic    Harold Jones           1990   Bailliere
                Disease
Oral medicine   Oral Diagnosis                                            1983   St.Lovis.Toronto
Oral medicine   Precis de stomatologie             M.Dechaume             1980   Masson
Oral medicine   Review of Diagnoisi oral           Norman K.Wood          1979   The C.V.
                Medicine,Badiology.And                                           Mosbyco
                treatmeut planning
Oral medicine   Leadership management and role     Treue B.Woodall        1977   The C.V.Mosby
                delineation
Oral medicine   Infection control and              Chris H.Miller         1998   Mosby
                monagment of zardous materials
                for the dcntal team
Oral medicine   Oral Medicine                      Trwin Walter scopp     1969   The C.v. Mosby
Oral medicine   Burkt's oral medicine              Malcolma A. lynch      1977   J.B.Lippincolt
Oral medicine   Slide interpretation in oral       Crispiau scully               Oxford Medical
                diseases                                                         pubication
Oral medicine   Nutvition in Preventive Dentstry   Nizel                         Saunders
                science and practice                                             company
Oral medicine   Stda enodonto stomatologie         G.Ficarra              1990   Masson
Oral medicine   Review of nutrition and diet       Saint lovis            1973   Sve Rodwell
                therapy                                                          williams
Oral medicine   Acolonr Atlas of atds              Maansary               1994   Wolfe publishing
Oral medicine   Facial pain                        Parker E.Mahan         1991   Lea &FDebiger
Oral medicine   Aelour atlas of oval medicine      Willian R.Tyldesley    1978   Wolfe Medical
Oral medicine   Atlas of Diseases of the oral      J.J.Pindbory           1973   Munksgaard
                mvcosa
Oral medicine      Introdvction to oral medicine      Chisholn fer.Gvson            1978      W.B.Saunders
                                                                                              combany gtd
Oral medicine      Orofacial Disease                  Scully -porter                2003      Churchill
                                                                                              livingstone




                Area       Title                         Author              Year   Publisher
                Preventive Community dentistry           PSG Pubhisging      1980   Stephenl.Silberman
                                                         gmpany
                Preventive   Community dental health mosby                   1993   Anthony w.jony
                Preventive   Comprehensive        dental Mosby company       1980   Irene r woodall
                             hygiene care
                Preventive   Oral      healthcare     in Macmillan press     1997   Lindsay hunter
                             pregnancy and infancy
                Preventive   Dental public health        John wright and     1974   Geoffrey l.slack
                                                         sons
                Preventive   Introduction     to    oral Quintessence        1976   Hans R
                             preventive Medicine         books
                Preventive   Fluoride in preventive James R.melberg          1983   Quintessence
                             Dentistry
                Preventive   Nmtrition,Diet,andoral      Amolrew jrueyg      1999   oxforal
                             health
                Preventive   Behavioural sciences for Chill livigstone       2000   Gerry humphris
                             dentistry
                Preventive   Community oral health Kathy             voigt   2005   Elseviers aunders
                             for dental hygienist        geurink
                Preventive   Dentistry,dental     praice Brian A. burt       2005   Elseivier saunders
                             the commanity
                Preventive   Text book of community Satish chandra           2005   Jaypee
                             dentitry
                Preventive   Community dental health George M.gluck          2009   Mosby
                Preventive   Dentistry           Dental Brian A.Burt         1992   W.B.SAunders
                             Practice,and            the
                             Community
                Preventive   Community Dental health George M.Gluck          1998   Mosby
                Preventive   Internationd Dental care John Ingle             1978   Ballinger            publishing
           delivery systems                                        company
Preventive Saliva and dental health      W.m.Edgar          1990   British Dental Joural
Preventive Prevntive                     Per Axelsson       2004   Quintessence books
           materials,methools
           programsvoly
Dental     Basic Dental materials        John               2003   Jarpee brothers
materials                                Jmanappallil
Dental     Dental materials and their    Williamj o,brien   1997   Quintessence books
materials  selection
Dental     Philips, skinners science     Ralph pluilips     1991   W.b saunebers
materials  of dental materials
Dental     Dental           materials    Robertj craig      2004   Mosby
materials  properties               &
           manipulation
Dental     Clinical aspects of Dental    marciagladwin      2000   Lippincott
materials  Materials                                               Williams&wilkins
Dental     Dental Materials              Hatrick            2003   Saunderes
materials
Dental     Lapratigue Du scellement      M.leH.Batares      1975   Julien prelat
materials  enclinique odonto & to
           matologique
Dental     Matweial in Dentistry         Jackl Ferracane    2001   Lippin   cott      Williams
materials  Principles&applications                                 &wilkins
Dental     Dental           materials    Robert G.craic     1975   C.V.mosby
materials  properties&manipulation
Dental      Philips Science of dental                       2003   Saunders
materials  materials
Dental     Dental           materials    RobertG craig      1978   C.V.mosby
materials  aproblem-oriented
           approach
Dental     Dental materials invivo       Goerge eliades     2003   quintessence
materials  aging             &related
           phenomena
Dental     Biomedical and dental         Charles            1980   Plenum press
materials  applicalions of pobymers      G.oebeleir
Dental     Dental     materials     in   M.Hreisbish        1982   Johw wriyht
materials  chinical Dentistry
Dental     Science      of     dental    Rolph W.phi        1982   Saunders company
materials  materials
Dental     Science des materials         Eugene             1967   Julier
materials  dentures'                     W.skinier
Dental     Dental           materials    Robert             1983   Mosby
materials  properties             and
           manipulation
Dental     An atlas of glass-            Qrahom jmount      1990   Martin dunity
materials  Ionomer cements
Dental      Anderson's        Applied    John F.nccabye     1985   Blackwell scientific
materials   dental materials
Dental      Restorative         dental   Cril T. tlomis     1993   Mospy
materials   materials
Dental      Dentente Psychomusicale      M.Gabai J.Jost     1972   Librairie Maloine S.a
materials   en Odonto Stomatologie
Dental      Clinical                 Karl
                           Restorative                 1988        Lea & Febiger Philadelphia
materials   Materials and Techniques F.Lieinfelder
                                     JackE.lemons
Dental      Dental Materials and William           J.O 2002        Quintessence
materials   Their Selection          Brien
Dental      Applied dental Materials John F.Mccabe     1998        Blackwell
materials
Dental      Elements     of   Dental     Ralph W.Phillips   1984   W.B Saunders Company
materials   Materials for Dental
            Hygienists and Assistants
Dental      Dental          Materials    Robert G.Craig 1975       C.V Mosby
materials   Properties            and    William      J.O
            Manipulation                 Brien
Dental      An Outline of Dental         William      J.O 1978     Saunders
materials   Materials                    Brien
Dental      Restorative       Dental     Robert G.Craig   1980     Mosby
materials   Materials
Dental      Polymeric         Dental  Braden     Clarke     1997   Springer
materials   Materials                 Nicholson Parker
Dental      The Clinical Handling of  Bernard               1995   Wright
materials   Dental Materials          G.N.Smith Paul
                                      S.Wright
Dental      Material    Science    in E.H.Greenes J.K       1972   The Williams and wilkins
materials   Dentistry                 Harcourt      E.P            Co.
                                      Lautenschlager
Dental      Phillips    Science    of Kenneth J.            1991   Saunders
materials   Dental Materials
Dental      A        Textbook      of    Richard            1982   Saunders
materials   Preventive Dentistery        E.Stallorol
Dental      Scientific Aspects of        J.A Fraunhobbes    1975   Bulten Worths
materials   Dental Materials
Dental      Dental Technology and        John Ofone         1979   Blackwell
materials   Materials for Students
Dental      Glass Ionomer Dedntal   Shigeru          1993          Ishiyaku EuroAmerica Inc.
materials   Cement The Material and Katsuyamo
            Their Clinical use      Tatsoya Ishikawa
                                    Benji Fujii
Dental      Dental Materials and Harold Wilson 1988                British Dental Journal
materials   Their          Clinical John W.Mclean
            Applications            David Brown
       Dental      Abrege De Biomateriaux G.Burdairon            1981   Masson
       materials   Dentaires
       Dental      Advances      In    Glass Carel            L. 1999   Quintessence
       materials   Ionomer Cements            Davidson        A.
                                              major
Color Atlas of Dental implant surgery Michael S.Block           2007    Saunolers
Oral implantology                       Andre Schroeder         1991    Thieme
Imediate Function Esthetics in implant Peter moy                2008    Quintessence
dentistry
Laboratory techniques for the           Ross Taylor             1990    quinte ssence
Branemark system
Dental implant ology and Prostheses     Morton                  1977    J.B.L:ppincott
The Branemark osseo integrated          Alber ktsson            1989    Quintessence
implant
Dental impants:Are They for me?         Thomas D.Taylor         1990    Quintessence
Endosseous implant for Maxillo facial   Block                   1995    W.B.Saunders
Re Construction
Implant Prosthodontics                  Maurice J.Fagan         1990    Year Book Medical
Hydroxylapa Ti Te implants              H.Denissen              1985    Piccin
Contemporary implant dentistry          Carl E.Misch            1999    Mosby

Human implantation                        Y.W.Loke              1995    Cambridge
The Dental implant                        Ralph V,Mckinney      1985    Psg publishing
Manual of Dental implants                 David p.SARMENT       2004    Lexi comp
Soft Tissue and Esthetic considerations   Anthony G.sclar       2003    Quintessnce
in implant therapy
Esthetie implant dentistry                Patrick palacci       2001    Quintessence
Atlas of oral implantology                A.Norman cranin       1999    Mosby
Implant Prosthodontics                    Stvens                2000    Mosby
Color atlas of Dental implant surgery     BLock                 2001    W.B.Saunders
Bone reformation                          Stefan Lunolgren      2008    Quinte ssence
The Branemark No Vum protocol for         Brane mark            2001    Quintessence
same-Day Teeth
Risk Factors in implant dentistry         Franck Renouard       2008    Quintessence
Dental implant :The art and science       Babbush               2001    W.B.Saun ders
Color atlas Dental implant surgery        Michael s.Block       2007    Saun ders
Implant dentist today                                           1990    Picain
Implant dentistry today                                         1990    Picain
Implant dentistry today                   Linkow                1990    Piccin
Osseointgration and Autogenos onlay       Branemark             2001    Quintessence
bone graft
Bone biology ,harvesting ,crafting for    Arunk.Garg            2004    quintessence
dental implant
Implants and resto rative dentisty        Gerard Mscortecci     2001    Martin Dunitz
Dental implants                           Babbush               1991    W.B.Saunders Company
Oral rehabilitation with implant          Vicente Jimenez-        1999   Quintessence
supported prostheses                      Lopez
Implants in qualitatively compromised     Georg Watzek            2004   quintessence
bone
The sinus bone graft                      Jensen Ole              2006   quintessence Publishing
Osseointegration and esthetics            Carlos Eduardo                 Quintessence Pulishing
                                          Francischone
Immediate loading in implant dentistry    Vicent Jimenez-         2005   Quintessence
                                          Lopez
Clinical marual implant dentistry         Mithridade              2003   Quintessence Publishing
                                          Davarpanah Henry               CO.
                                          Martinez


Implants in clinical dentistry            Richard M palmer        2002   Martin Qunitz
                                          Brian Jsmith
Practical implant dentistry               Ashok Sethi Thomas      2005   Quintessence
                                          Kaue
Immediate loading of endosseous           Georgios Romanes        2005   Quintessence
implants in the posterior area of the
mandible
Dental implant prosthetics                Carl E.Misck            2005   Mosby
Principles and practice of implant        Charles M.Weiss         2001   Mosby
dentistry                                 Adam Weiss
Contemporny implant dentistny             Canl E.Misck            2008   Mosby
Osseointegration                          George A.Zarle          2008   Quintessence
Glossary of oral maxillofacial implants   N.Broggini              2007   Qp
Atlas of tooth and implant –supprted      Lawrence A.Wein         2003   Quintessence
prosthodontics                            berg
Bone grafting in oral implantology        Federico Heranandez     2006   Quintessence
techniques and clinical application       ALfaro
Guided bone Regeneration in implant       Daniel Buser Christer   1994   Quintessence
dentistry                                 Dahlin
ACOLOR atlas the branemark system         Richard A.Rasmussen     1992   Ishiyaku EuroAmerica,Inc
of oral recanstruction
Aging,Osteo porosis and dental            George zarb             2002   Quintessence
implants
The Sac classification in implant         A.Dauryon               2009   Quintessence
dentistny
Dental implants fundamental and           Kenneth orth            1994   Mosby
advanced laboratory Technology                                           Wolfe
Medicine for dentas students                R Alagappan             2001   Jaypee
Modern dental assisting                     Donil.Bird              2002   Saunders
Clinical dentistry                          Ivorg.Chestnutt         2002   Churchill living stone
Hand book of clinical dentistry             Richard a.Lehman,Dmd,   2005   Lexl-Comp
                                            Mphl
Review of basic science clinical            Jacke.Wells             1980   LiPPIN
dentistry VI (basic science)                                               COTT(LW&W)
Review of basic science&clinical            Jack E.Wells            2003   BC Decker Inc
dentistry(V II )(Clinical dentistry)
In Fection control and mange ments of       Chris H.Miller          2005   Elsevier,Mosby
hazardous materials for dental team
Clinical investigations of medical          Groten                  2004   Quintessenece
devices in dentistry
Text book of medical parasitology           Jayaram                 2007   Jaypee brothers
Office procedures for the team                                      1985   Mosby
Practical infetion control in denstry       James Cottone           1996   Williams and Wikins
Manual of dental hygine                     Botticelli              2002   Quintcssence
Endocrinology                               Charls Brook            2001   Black well
Biosta tistics (The bare essentials)        Nor man                 2008   Decker
Clinical practice of the dental hygienist   Esther M.Wilkins        2009   Wolters Klumer
                                                                           health
Comprehensive review of dental              Michelel .Darby         2006   Mosbys
hygiene
Treatment planning in dentistry             Stephen J.Stefanac      2007   Mosby
Comprehensive review of dental              Michele . Darby         2002   Mosby
hygiene
Decision making in dental treatment         ST- Louis , Missouri    1994   Mosby
planning
The art of the smile                        Rafi Romano             2005   Quentessence
Trea tment planning general dental          Crawfod A.Bain          2003   Churchill Livingstone
practice
Geriatric dentistry in eastern european     Walter Kunzel           1991   Quintessence
countri                                                                    Publishing
Medical problems in dentistry               Orispian scully         1999   Wright
Fwrther mcq in pharmacy pratice             Lilan Mazzopandr        2006   Pharmaceutical press
Special care in dentiotny                   Orispain scully         2007   Churchill liringstone
Oral bioscience                             Dauied .B Benigason     1999   Churchill liringstone
Life- Extending techno logies A          Theodore J.Herbert gerjuoy             Pergamon policy
technology assessment                                                           studies
Evidence based dentistry for effective   Jan clarkson                   2003    Martin dunitz
practice
A dental treasure chest                  Wolfram Bucking                2007    Guintenence




       Area            Title                     Author               Year     Publisher
       Oral And        Distraction Osteognesis   William H.bell       2007     Bc Deker
       Maxillofacial   Facial Skeleton
       Surgery
       Oral And        A Color Atlas Of          Russell Hopkins      1987     Wolfe Medical
       Maxillofacial   Preprosthtic Oral
       Surgery         Surgery
       Oral And        Complication In Head      David W Eisell       2009     Mosby
       Maxillofacial   And Neck Surgery
       Surgery
       Oral And        Facial Trauma             Seth R Thaller       2008     Informa
       Maxillofacial
       Surgery
       Oral And        Fractures Of The          Johannes             2009     Quintessence
       Maxillofacial   Mandibular Condibular
       Surgery         Condyle
       Oral And        Evolving Trendsim         Chandrakant p .      2009     CBS
       Maxillofacial   Oral And Maxillofacial    taware
       Surgery         Surgery
       Oral And        Magnetic Resonance Of     E . Palacios         ‫غير‬      Thieme
       Maxillofacial   The                                            ‫مسجل‬
       Surgery         Temporomandibular
                       Joint
       Oral And        Oral Maxillofacial        George               2008     Quintessence
       Maxillofacial   Surgery                   Dimitroulis
       Surgery
       Oral And        Maxillary Sinus           Tiziano Testorri     2009     Quintessence
       Maxillofacial   Surgery And
       Surgery         Alternatives in
                       Treatment
       Oral And        Head And Neack            A . G . D Maran      1993     Batterworth
       Maxillofacial   Surgery
       Surgery
       Oral And        Oral And Intravenous      Robert E Marx        2007     Quintessence
       Maxillofacial   Biophosphate induced
       Surgery         Osteonecrosis Of The
                Jaws
Oral And        Pain And Anxiety          John G Meechan      1998   Oxford
Maxillofacial   Control For The                                      University
Surgery         Conscious Dental                                     Press
                Patient
Oral And        Dental And Oral           Letty Moss          1990   Lea And
Maxillofacial   Tissues                                              Febiger
Surgery
Oral And        Petite Chirugie De La     Marcel Parant       1974   Expansion
Maxillofacial   Bouche                                               Scientifique
Surgery
Oral And        Surgical Treatment Of     John Marquis        1974   The Williams
Maxillofacial   Facial Injuries                                      And Wilkins
Surgery                                                              Company
Oral And        Oral Surgery In Dental    Eberhard Kruger     1981   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   Practice
Surgery
Oral And        Management Of             Jeffrey P Okeson    1992   Mosby Year
Maxillofacial   Temporomandibular                                    Book
Surgery         Disorders And
                Occlusion
Oral And        Essentials Of Plastic     Nicholas G          1987   Williams And
Maxillofacial   Maxillofacial And         Georgiade                  Wilkins
Surgery         Reconstructive Surgery
Oral And        Oral And Maxillofacial    Daniel M laskin     1985   Mosby
Maxillofacial   Surgery                                              Company
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic Surgery Of The    Heinz Bohmert       1974   Thieme
Maxillofacial   Head And Neak And
Surgery         The Female Breast
Oral And        Diseases of the oral      M strasshurg        1972   Josef godry
Maxillofacial   emu color atlas                                      berlin
Surgery
Oral And        color atlas of oral and   Maurice J oringer   1984   ‫غير مسجل‬
Maxillofacial   electro surgery
Surgery
Oral And        clinical aspects and      Herlert Harnisch    1974   Die
Maxillofacial   treatment of cysts of the                            Quintessenz
Surgery         Jaws
Oral And        Lecture Note on           P m ford            1976   Blackwell
Maxillofacial   Clinical medicine and
Surgery         surgery for dental
                students
Oral And        Tempromandibular          Welden e bell       1990   Mosby
Maxillofacial   disorders
Surgery
Oral And        Laser applications in  Gay A Caton          1997   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   oral and maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery
Oral And        The temporomandibular Bernard g             1992   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   joint
Surgery
Oral And        A textbook and color      John e deb        1990   Wolfe medical
Maxillofacial   atlas of the
Surgery         temporomandibular
                joint
Oral And        Diagnosis of the          Richard w         1993   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   tempomandibular joint
Surgery
Oral And        Impacted teeth            Charles c         1993   W b sunders
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Tempomandibular           Andrew s Kaplan   1991   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   disorders diagnosis and
Surgery         treatment
Oral And        Bone augmentation in      Khoury fouad      2007   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   oral implantology
Surgery
Oral And        Craniomandibular and      Franco morgini    1989   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   tmj orthopedics
Surgery
Oral And        The diagnosis therapy      Shklar           1984   ‫غير مسجل‬
Maxillofacial   management and
Surgery         rehabilitation of the oral
                cancer
Oral And        Oral and maxillofacial     K ruger          1982   ‫غير مسجل‬
Maxillofacial   traumatology
Surgery
Oral And        Anatomie maxilla-         G couly           1974   Julien relat
Maxillofacial   facial 25 questions
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic surgery v 1       Mc carthy         1990   W b sunders
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic surgery v 2       Mc carthy         1990   W b sunders
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic surgery v 3       Mc carthy         1990   W b sunders
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic surgery v 4       Mc carthy         1990   W b sunders
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic surgery v 5        Mc carthy          1990   W b sunders
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Surgery for dental         Micheal f          1974   Blackwell
Maxillofacial   student
Surgery
Oral And        The impact lower           A j mac greogr     1985   Oxford
Maxillofacial   wisdom tooth                                         university press
Surgery
Oral And        Operative extraction of    Peter tetsch       1985   Wolfe medical
Maxillofacial   wisdom teeth
Surgery
Oral And        An outline of oral         H c killery        1975   Bristol john
Maxillofacial   surgery part i                                       wright and
Surgery                                                              sons
Oral And        An outline of oral         H c killery        1975   Bristol john
Maxillofacial   surgery part ii                                      wright and
Surgery                                                              sons
Oral And        Benign cystic lesions of   H c killery        1977   ‫غير مسجل‬
Maxillofacial   the jaws their diagnosis
Surgery         and treatment
Oral And        Cleft palate and speech    Muriel e           1970   Charcill living
Maxillofacial                                                        stone
Surgery
Oral And        Modern practice in         William h bell     1992   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   orthoganathic and
Surgery         reconstructive surgery
                v1
Oral And        Modern practice in         William h bell     1992   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   orthoganathic and
Surgery         reconstructive surgery
                v2
Oral And        Modern practice in         William h bell     1992   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   orthoganathic and
Surgery         reconstructive surgery
                v3
Oral And        Facial aesthetic surgery   Robert j brown     1993   Mosby
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Contemporary oral and      Petersone          1993   Mosby
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Cleft lip and palate v1    Samuel berkowitz   1995   Singular
Maxillofacial                                                        publishing
Surgery                                                              group
Oral And        Cleft lip and palate v1   Samuel berkowitz   1995   Singular
Maxillofacial                                                       publishing
Surgery                                                             group
Oral And        Atlas of craniofacial     Kenneth e salyer   1999   Lippincott
Maxillofacial   and cleft surgery                                   raven
Surgery
Oral And        An atlas of head and      John m lore        1973   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   neck surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Atlas of aesthetic        G jost             1975   Masson and cie
Maxillofacial   plastic surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Facial trauma and         William b          1979   Mosby
Maxillofacial   concomitant problems
Surgery
Oral And        An atlas of minor oral    David a mc grown 1989     Mosby
Maxillofacial   surgery principles and
Surgery         practice
Oral And        Manuel de xodontie        Masson             1977   ‫غير مسجل‬
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Elements de chirugie      J pons             1972   Medicala
Maxillofacial   bucco maxilla facial
Surgery
Oral And        Maxillofacial trauma an   John r             1983   Praeger
Maxillofacial   international                                       publishers
Surgery         perspective
Oral And        Plastic and               Charles k beyer    1983   Thieme
Maxillofacial   reconstructive surgery
Surgery         of the eyelids
Oral And        Electrosurgery in the     Fritz schon        1971   Die
Maxillofacial   dental practice                                     Quintessenz
Surgery
Oral And        Les cancers de la cavite M meley             1987   Masson and cie
Maxillofacial   buccale et de
Surgery         loropharynx
Oral And        Le electrochirugie en    Fritz schon         1971   Quintessenz
Maxillofacial   odontostomatomatology
Surgery
Oral And        An atlas of head and      John m lore        1973   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   neck surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Expert third molar        Lily t Garcia      1990   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   extraction
Surgery
Oral And        Manuel de exodontie       C lecointre        1977   Masson and cie
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Traite de technique         M portmann         1975   Masson and cie
Maxillofacial   chirurgicale o.r.l et
Surgery         cervico faciale tome 1
Oral And        Traite de technique         M portmann         1975   Masson and cie
Maxillofacial   chirurgicale o.r.l et
Surgery         cervico faciale tome 2
Oral And        Clinical management of      Richard a pertes   1995   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   temporomandibular
Surgery         disorders and orofacial
                pain
Oral And        Color atlas of              Peter d            1998   Mosby
Maxillofacial   tempomandibular joint
Surgery         surgery
Oral And        Treatment of facial cleft   Kurt w butow       1990   Ishyaku
Maxillofacial   deformities                                           euroamerica inc
Surgery
Oral And        Minor surgery in            Uija k sodera      1994   Cambridge
Maxillofacial   practice                                              university press
Surgery
Oral And        Complication of head        Mark c             ‫غير‬    thieme
Maxillofacial   and neck surgery                               ‫مسجل‬
Surgery
Oral And        Principle of oral           J r moore          1965   Oxford
Maxillofacial   surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Surgery for dental          Michael wood       1984   Blackwell
Maxillofacial   students                    ents
Surgery
Oral And        Les extraction en           Maurice            1964   Julien prelat
Maxillofacial   chirugie dentaire
Surgery
Oral And        Plastic reconstructive      Stephen h          1990   mosbt
Maxillofacial   and aesthetic surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Hand book of local          Stanley malamed    2004   Elsevier mosby
Maxillofacial   anesthesia
Surgery
Oral And        Text book and color         John e debnorman 1990     Mosby
Maxillofacial   atlas of the
Surgery         tempomandibular joint
Oral And        Craniofacial surgery for    Daniel marchac     1982   Little brown
Maxillofacial   craniosynorosis                                       and company
Surgery
Oral And        Reconstructive              Raymon d j         1995   W b sunders
Maxillofacial   preprosthetic oral and
Surgery         maxillofacial surgery
Oral And        Atlas of oral and          Jon tom          1992    W b sunders
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Atlas of the face in       Richard m        1977    Mosby
Maxillofacial   genetic disorders
Surgery
Oral And        Symposium on               Nicholas g       1974    Mosby
Maxillofacial   management of cleft lip
Surgery         and palate and
                associated deformities
Oral And        Atlas of                   Franze harle     1999    Thieme
Maxillofacial   Craniomaxillofacial
Surgery         osteosynthesis
Oral And        Clinical transplantation   Peter j          1980    Mosby
Maxillofacial   in dental specialties
Surgery
Oral And        Surgical mcqs              J l craven       19885   Charcill living
Maxillofacial                                                       stone
Surgery
Oral And        Current advances in        William b        1990    Mosby
Maxillofacial   oral surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Multidisciplinary          Janusz bardach   1990    W b sunders
Maxillofacial   management of cleft lip
Surgery         and palate
Oral And        New concepts in            Harold geib      1994    Mosby
Maxillofacial   craniomandibular and
Surgery         chronic pain
                management
Oral And        Diagnostic and surgical    Ken ichiro       1989    W b sunders
Maxillofacial   arthroscopy of the
Surgery         temporomandibular
                joint
Oral And        Principles and practice    Joseph p         1996    Mosby
Maxillofacial   of temporomandibular
Surgery         joint arthroscopy
Oral And        Decision making in oral    Daniel m         2007    Quintessence
Maxillofacial   and maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery
Oral And        Text book for dental       H levison        1969    Blackwell
Maxillofacial   nurses
Surgery
Area            Title               Author                Year   Publisher
Oral And        Suturing techniques Sandro Siervo         2008   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   in oral surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Atlas of oral and Kan-ichi-seto           2003   Quintessence
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial
Surgery         rehabilitation
Oral And        Maxillofacial     Peter Booth             2007   Churchill
Maxillofacial   Surgery           Stephen A.Jong                 Livingstone      \
Surgery                                                          Elsevier
Oral And      Craniomaxillofacial    Alex M.Greenberg     2002   Springer
Maxillofacial Reconstructive and     Joachim Prein
Surgery       corrective     bone
              surgery
Oral And      Oral            and    Fonseca , Walker , 2005     Elsevier
Maxillofacial Maxillofacial          Betts , barber              Saunders
Surgery       Trauma vol1
Oral And      Textbook of oral       Neelima Anil Malik   2008   Jaypee Brothers
Maxillofacial and maxillofacial                                  medical
Surgery       Surgery                                            publisher
Oral And      Neuroanatomy text      John H.martin        2003   Mcgraw-Hill
Maxillofacial and atlas
Surgery
Oral And      Oral          cavity   Terry A.day          2006   Taylor      and
Maxillofacial reconstruction         Douglas A.Girad             Francis group
Surgery
Oral And      Clinical overview      Shahrokhc.Bagheri    2008   Mosby Elsevier
Maxillofacial of      oral    and    Chris\Jo
Surgery       maxillofacial
              surgery
Oral And      Oral            and    Jonathan Redlar      2007   Churchill
Maxillofacial maxillofacial          John W.Frame                Livingstone      \
Surgery       Surgery            \                               Elsevier
              Anobjective        –
              Based Textbook
Oral And        An atlas of head John M.Lore             1988   Saunders
Maxillofacial   and neck surgery
Surgery
Oral And        Maxillofacial       Peter word both      1999   Churchill
Maxillofacial   surgery                                         Livingstone
Surgery
Oral And        Maxillofacial       Peter word both      1999   Churchill
Maxillofacial   surgery                                         Livingstone
Surgery
Oral And      Maxillofacial          Peter word both     2003   Churchill
Maxillofacial Trauma            and                             Livingstone
Surgery       Esthetic        facial
              Reconstruction
Oral And      Cancer of the Head Eugene N.myers                 Saunder
Maxillofacial and neck
Surgery
Oral And      Head and neck Louis B.Harrison             2004   Lippincott
Maxillofacial cancer              A                             williams      and
Surgery       multidisclipinary                                 wilkins
              approach
Oral And      Clinical success in Jean-Marie             2006   Quintessence
Maxillofacial surgical          and Korbendau
Surgery       orthodontic
              treatment           of
              impacted teeth
Oral And      Dental            and Robert E.marx        2005   Quintessence
Maxillofacial craniofacial
Surgery       applications        of
              platelet-rich plasma
Oral And      Comprehensive          Stanley E.thawley   1999   Saunders
Maxillofacial management          of
Surgery       head and neck
              tumors vol1
Oral And      Comprehensive          Stanley E.thawley   1999   Saunders
Maxillofacial management          of
Surgery       head and neck
              tumors vol2
Oral And      An atlas of head John M.lore               2005   Saunders
Maxillofacial and neck surgery
Surgery
Oral And      Suturing techniques Sandro Siervo          2008   Quintessence
Maxillofacial in oral surgery
Surgery
Oral And      Alveolar               Olet.Jensen         2002   Quintessence
Maxillofacial Distraction
Surgery       Osteogenesis
Oral And        A practical guide to K.George vorghese         2008   Jaypee brothers
Maxillofacial   hospital dentistry                                    medical
Surgery                                                               publishers
Oral And        Textbook          of   David wray              2003   Churchill
Maxillofacial   general and oral                                      Livingstone
Surgery         surgery
Oral And        Principles of oral     Michel Miloro           2004   BC Decker Inc
Maxillofacial   and maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery vol1
Oral And        Principles of oral     Michel Miloro           2004   BC Decker Inc
Maxillofacial   and maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery vol2
Oral And        Complication      in   SK Kaluskar             2002   Jaypee Brothers
Maxillofacial   Endoscopic sinus
Surgery         surgery Diagnosis ,
                Prevention       and
                management
Oral And        Oral             and   Fonseca , walker , 2005        Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial          Betts , Barber                 Saunders
Surgery         trauma vol2
Oral And        Atlas of aesthetic     Gregory Latrenta        2004   Saunders
Maxillofacial   face     and neck
Surgery         surgery
Oral And        Craniofacial           Mikhail L.samchakov     2001   Mosby
Maxillofacial   distraction
Surgery         Osteogenesis
Oral And        Contemporary oral      Peterson , Ellis , Hupp 2003   Mosby
Maxillofacial   and maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery
Oral And        Atlas of head and      Byran J.Bailey          2001   Lippincott
Maxillofacial   neck         surgery                                  williams   and
Surgery         otolaryngology                                        wilkins
Oral And        Contemporary oral      James R.Hupp            2008   Mosby Elsevier
Maxillofacial   and maxillofacial      Edward Ellis
Surgery         surgery                Myronr Tucker
Oral And        Atlas             of   Janusz Bardach          1999   Lippincott-
Maxillofacial   craniofacial     and                                  Raven
Surgery         cleft surgery
Oral And        oral             and   Fonseca , Fiost       , 2000   Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial          Hersh , Levin                  Science
Surgery         surgery /1/
Oral And        oral             and   Fonseca ,     Betts   , 2000   Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial          Turvey .                       Science
Surgery         surgery /2/
Oral And        oral             and   Fonseca , Marciani , 2000      Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial          Hendler                        Science
Surgery         surgery /3/
Oral And        oral            and Fonseca     ,   Bays   , 2000   Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial       Quinn                           Science
Surgery         surgery /4/
Oral And        oral            and Fonseca                  2000   Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial                                       Science
Surgery         surgery /5/
Oral And        oral            and Fonseca , Backer , 2000         Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial       Wolford                         Science
Surgery         surgery /6/
Oral And        oral            and Fonseca , Powers , 2000         Elsevier
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial       Barbers                         Science
Surgery         surgery /7/
Oral And        Oral cancer          Robert A.Renyh          2000   Quintessence
Maxillofacial
Surgery
Oral And        Manuel            de Christian , Biou        1978   Masson
Maxillofacial   chirurgie buccaie
Surgery
Oral And      Comprehensive          Thawley , Panje , 1999         Saunders
Maxillofacial management        of   Batsukis Lindberg
Surgery       head and neck
              tumors vol2
Oral And      Medicine        and    Steven Porter crispian 1999    Churchill
Maxillofacial surgery          for   , Philip welsky ,              Livingstone
Surgery       Dentistry              Michael Okesson
Oral And      Handbook of third      George Dimitroulis     2001    Planta tree
Maxillofacial molar surgery
Surgery
Oral And      oral            and    Omar Abubaker           2001   Hanley      and
Maxillofacial maxillofacial          Enneth Benson                  Belofus
Surgery       surgery secrets                                       Medical
Oral And      Textbook of oral       Nerlina Anil Malik      2008   Jaypee Brothers
Maxillofacial and maxillofacial
Surgery       surgery
Oral And      Head and neck          B.K.B.Berkovitz         1988   Wolfe Medical
Maxillofacial anatomy                                               Publications
Surgery                                                             LTD
Oral And      Mcminn’s       color   Bari     M.Logan    , 2004     Mosby
Maxillofacial atlas of Head and      Patricia A.Reynolds ,
Surgery       neck anatomy           Ralph T.Hutchings
Oral And      Craniofacial           Gerhard Pfeifer       1991     George Thieme
Maxillofacial Abnormalities and                                     Verlay
Surgery       clefts of the lip ,
              Alveolus and palate
Oral And      Clinical               Harold GELB             1985   Saunders
Maxillofacial management         of
Surgery       head , neck and
              TMJ pain and
              dysfunction
Oral And      Oral surgery in         Eberhard Kruger      1981   Quintessence
Maxillofacial dental practice
Surgery
Oral And      Surgery of facial       Dingman              1964   Saunders
Maxillofacial fractures
Surgery
Oral And      Diseases           of   Morgan , Hall        1977   Mosby
Maxillofacial temporomandibular
Surgery       apparatus           a
              multidisclipinary
              approach
Oral And      Surgical anatomy        Anson                1973   Saunders
Maxillofacial of                the
Surgery       temporomandibular
              bone and ear
Oral And      Electrosurgery in       Oringer              1975   Saunders
Maxillofacial dentistry
Surgery
Oral And      Preprosthetic oral      Thomas J. starshak   1980   Mosby
Maxillofacial and maxillofacial
Surgery       surgery
Oral And      Head and neck           Donald               1984   Saunders
Maxillofacial cancer
Surgery       Management of the
              difficult case
Oral And      Complications in        Krespy               1993   Saunders
Maxillofacial Head and neck
Surgery       surgery
Oral And      Textbook of oral        Gustavo Kruger       1984   Mosby
Maxillofacial and maxillofacial
Surgery       surgery
Oral And      Facial          scars   J.Regan Thomas       1989   Mosby
Maxillofacial incision , revision
Surgery       and camouflage
Oral And      Surgical correction     Bell                 1980   Saunders
Maxillofacial of        dentofacial
Surgery       deformities vol1
Oral And      Surgical correction     Bell                 1980   Saunders
Maxillofacial of        dentofacial
Surgery       deformities vol2
Oral And      Surgical correction     Bell                 1980   Saunders
Maxillofacial of        dentofacial
Surgery         deformities vol3
Oral And        Oral             and     W.Harry Archer            1975    Saunders
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery vol1
Oral And        Oral             and     W.Harry Archer            1975    Saunders
Maxillofacial   maxillofacial
Surgery         surgery vol1
Oral And        Cleft Palate and         Herbert K.Cooper          1979    Saunders
Maxillofacial   cleft Lip
Surgery         A team approach to
                clinical
                management and
                rehabilitation of the
                patient
Oral    And     A textbook and           John E. de B Norman 1990          Wolf Medical
Maxillofacial   colour atlas of the      Paul Bramler                      publication
Surgery         temporomandibular
                joint
Oral    And     Cranial Osteopathy       Torsten lien              2004    Elsevier
Maxillofacial   Principles       and
Surgery         practice
Oral    And     Clinical success in                                2003    Quintessence
Maxillofacial   Impacted        third
Surgery         molar extraction
Oral    And     Guide to dental          Seth R.Thaller            1988    Williams       &
Maxillofacial   problems          for                                      wilkins
Surgery         physicians       and
                surgeons




                   Title                    Author           Year          Publisher
        Medical Considerations          Michael Glick       2005      Quintessence Pub.Co.
        For Dental Practice
        3d Interactive Tooth                                          Brown & herbranson
        Atlas                                                         ™
        3d Interactive Atlas of                             2007      Brown & herbranson
        skull osteology with                                          ™
        cranial nerves
        Multilingual glossary of        F.P.G.M. Vander     2004      Quintessence Pub.Co.
        orthodontic terms               linden
        vol1
        Orofacial functions             F.P.G.M. Vander               Quintessence
                                        linden                        Publishing .Co.
        Facial orthodpedies             F.P.G.M. Vander     2005      Quintessence
                                             linden                        Publishing .Co.
                Facial growth, dentition     William r.proffit   2006      Quintessence
                and function                                               Publishing .Co.
                Facial growth                F.P.G.M. Vander     2004      Quintessence
                                             linden                        Publishing .Co.
                Surgical procedures in                           2007      Quintessence
                implant dentistry                                          Publishing .Co.
                Oral surgery 1               Neukam                        Quintessence
                                                                           Publishing .Co.
                Oral surgery 2               Neukam              2004      Quintessence
                                                                           Publishing .Co.
                Dental explorer              Wolfgang            2005      Quintessence
                                             kohlbach                      Publishing .Co.
                Endodontics                  O.J.Pontius         2005      Quintessence
                                                                           Publishing .Co.
                Visual Endodontics           m. haapasalo                  Quintessence
                curriculum                                                 Publishing .Co.
                Patient education on         Basting /ammann 2007          Quintessence
                DVD                                                        Publishing .Co.
                Laser in dentistry           Mortiz /beer        2006      Quintessence
                                                                           Publishing .Co.
                DS OML                       m. strabburg        2007      Quintessence
                                                                           Publishing .Co.
                DS X-RAY                     S.C.White           2007      Quintessence
                                                                           Publishing .Co.




        Orthodontics books


Area           Title                           Author                   Year   Publisher
Orthodontics   Essentials of Orthognathic      Reyneke, Johan P.        2003   Quintessence Puplishing
               Surgery                                                         Co, Inc (China)


Orthodontics   Early Orthodontic Treatment     Subtelny                 2000   Quintessence Puplishing
                                                                               Co, Inc (U.S.A)

Orthodontics   Garden of Orthodontics          Cozzani, Giuseppe        2000   Quintessence Puplishing
                                                                               Co, Inc (Germany)

Orthodontics   Orthodontics     –   Current Graber,          Thomas, 2005      Mosby
               Principles and Techniques    Robert          Vanasrdall
                                              and Katherine Vig.
Orthodontics   The Orthodontic Treatment      Adrian Becker           2007   Informa Healthcare (U.K)
               of Impacted Teeth (2nd
               Edition)

Orthodontics   1001 Tips for Orthodontics & Rodriguez Yanez           2007   Amolca
               its Secrets
Orthodontics   Dentofacial Orthopedics with Thomas M. Graber          1997   Mosby Year Book Inc.
               Functional Appliances (2nd
               Edition)


Orthodontics   Handbook of Orthodontics       Robert E. Moyers        1988   Year Book Medical Pub;
                                                                             4 Sub edition
Orthodontics   Cephalometric orthodontique    Michel lauglade         1978   Malaue-S.A.Editeur
Orthodontics   Orthodotics - Surgical         Paolo Ronchi            2001          Quintessence
               Treatment of Dentofacial                                             Puplishing Co, Inc
               Anomalies                                                            (Italy)

Orthodontics   Textbook of Orthodontics       Gurkeerat Singh         2007   Ajanta     Offset     &
                                                                             Packagings Ltd.,    New
                                                                             Delhi
Orthodontics   Surgical Treatment Objective   Larry                   1985   Mosby (U.S.A)
                                              Wolford, Dugan, Fra
                                              nk Hilliard

Orthodontics   Orthodontic Cephalometry       Athanasios        E.    1994   Mosby Year Book Inc.,
                                              Athanasiou                     St. Louis
Orthodontics   SmartClip        Self-Ligating Hugo Trevisi            2007   Mosby Ltd.
               Appliance System
Orthodontics   Facial and Dental Planning     William       Arnett,   2004   Mosby Ltd.
               for Orthodontists and Oral     DDS, FAC and
               Surgeons                       Richard           P.
                                              McLaughlin,      BS,
                                              DDS
Orthodontics   Tip-edge orthodontics and Richard Parkhouse            2003   Mosby Elsevier
               the plus bracket
Orthodontics   Introduction to Orthognathic Johan P. Reyneke,         1991   Ishiyaku EuroAmerica,
               Surgery                        William G. Evans,              Inc.
                                              andAntony G. H.
                                              McCollum
Orthodontics   Orthodontic Concepts and van der Linden,               2000/ Quintessence Puplishing
               Strategies                     Frans P.G.M.            2004 Co, Inc
Orthodontics   Clinical Success in Early      Antonio Petti           2005 Quintessence Puplishing
                                                                            Co, Inc
               Orthodontic Treatment

Orthodontics   Clinical Success in Surgical    Jean Marie           2006    Quintessence Intenational
               and Orthodontic Treatment       Korbendew
               of Impacted Teeth

Orthodontics   Edgewise Orthodontics           Raymond.C.Thurow     1966    Mosby

Orthodontics   Diognostic Orthodontique        Michel lauglade      1981    Malaue-S.A.Editeur

Orthodontics   Atlas of Advanced               Anthony D.            1998   Elsevier Health Sciences
               Orthodontics: A Guide to        Viazis, Judy Fletcher
               Clinical Efficiency

Orthodontics   Evaluation, Diagnosis and       Peter E. Dawson      1989    Mosby Title
               Treatment of Occlusal
               Problems

Orthodontics   Orthodontic Review        Jeryl English, Timo 2009           Mosby Ltd.
                                         Peltomaki,      Kate
                                         Pham-Litschel
Orthodontics   Orthodontic Management of Bennett John C. ,    2002          Mosby Elsevier Science
               The Dentition with the Mclaughlin Richard
               Preadjusted Appliance     P.

Orthodontics   Orthodontic Treatment of the    Moschos            2006      Mosby Ltd.
               Class II Noncompliant           Papadopoulos, DDS,
               Patient                         Dr Med Dent

Orthodontics   Problem       Solving      in   C. J. Burstone, M. R. 2000   Quintessence Publishing
               Orthodontics                    Marcotte                     Co Inc.
Orthodontics   Applications of Orthodontic     Jong Suk, Lee, Jung 2007     Quintessence Pub Co.
               Mini-Implants                   Kook,Kim, Young-
                                               Chel Park, Robert L.
                                               Vanarsdall

Orthodontics   Orthodontic Management of       Michael Arvystas     2003    Martin Dunitz
               Agenesis       and    Other
               Complexities
Orthodontics   The 20 Principles of the        Alexander, R. G.     2008    Quintessence    Puplishing
               Alexander Discipline                                         Co, Inc
Orthodontics   Excess       Face    Height     Linder-Aronson,    2000      Quintessence    Puplishing
               Malocclusion                    Sten and Woodside,           Co, Inc
                                               Donald G
Orthodontics   Twin Block Functional           William J. Clark   2002      Mosby Ltd.
               Therapy
Orthodontics   Orthodontic Concepts and    van der Linden,         2004   Quintessence Puplishing
               Strategies                  Frans P.G.M.                   Co, Inc
Orthodontics   Textbook of Orthodontics    Samir E Bishara         2001   W. B. Saunders
Orthodontics   Contemporary Orthodontics   William R. Proffit,     2007   Mosby Elsevier
                                           Henry W. Fields, Jr.
                                           and David M. Sarver
Orthodontics   Orthodontic Concepts and Frans P.G.M                2004   Quintessence Publishing
               Strategies
Orthodontics   Clinical Problem Solving in Declan Millett and      2005   Elsevier
               Orthodontics and Paediatric Richard Welbury
               Dentistry

Orthodontics   Invisible Orthodontics         Giuseppe    Scuzzo, 2003    Quintessence Publishing
                                              Kyoto Takemoto
Orthodontics   Biomechanics in Clinical       Ravindra Nanda      1997    W.    B.        Saunders
               Orthodontics                                               Company

Orthodontics   Radiographic Cephalometry:     Alexander Jacobson   2006   Quintessence Publishing
               From Basics To 3-D Imaging

Orthodontics   Risk Management in             Graber, T. M.;       2004   Quintessence Publishing
               Orthodontics: Experts’ Guide   Eliades, Theodore;
               to Malpractice                 and Athanasiou,
                                              Athanasios E

Orthodontics   Problems and Procedures in     Frans P G M van der 1990    Quintessence Publishing
               Dentofacial Orthopedics,       Linden
               Volume 4

Orthodontics   The Clinical Management of     Terrance J. Spahl, 1987     Mosby-Year Book
               Basic Maxillofacial            John W. Witzig
               Orthopedic Appliances

Orthodontics   The Clinical Management of     Terrance J. Spahl, 1991     Mosby-Year Book
               Basic Maxillofacial            John W. Witzig
               Orthopedic Appliances

Orthodontics   The Clinical Management of     John W. Witzig       1989   Mosby-Year Book
               Basic Maxillofacial
               Orthopedic Appliance

Orthodontics   Theorie et Technique           P.R.Begg             1971   Saunders
               Orthodontiques de Begg
Orthodontics   Clinical Orthodontics V.1       Charles H.Tweed        1966   Mosby

Orthodontics   Clinical Orthodontics V.2       Charles H.Tweed        1966   Mosby

Orthodontics   Dentofacial      Deformities:Bruce N. Epker ,          1986   Mosby
               Integrated Orthodontic and   John Paul Stella ,
               Surgical Correction Part I   Leward C. Fish
Orthodontics   Dentofacial      Deformities:Bruce N. Epker ,          1986   Mosby
               Integrated Orthodontic and   John Paul Stella ,
               Surgical Correction Part II  Leward C. Fish
Orthodontics   Contemporary Treatment of    William R. Proffit,       2003   Mosby; illustrated edition
               Dentofacial Deformity        Raymond P. White ,
                                            David M. Sarver
Orthodontics   The Invisalign System        Tuncay, Orhan C           2006   Quintessence Publishing
Orthodontics   The Design, construction and C. Philip Adams           1984   Wright (Bristol)
               use of removable orthodontic
               appliances
Orthodontics   Removable        Orthodontic K.G. Isaacson, J.D.       2002   Wright
               Appliances                   Muir, R.T. Reed

Orthodontics   Removable         Orthodontic   Graber and             1977   W.B. Saunders Company
               Appliances                      Neumann
Orthodontics   The Activator in Interceptive   Egil P.Harvold         1974   Mosby
               Orthodontics
Orthodontics   Orthodontics:         Current   Thomas M.Graber        1985   Mosby
               Principles and Treatment        Brainerd F.Swain
Orthodontics   Orthodontics:         Current   Thomas M.Graber        1994   Mosby
               Principles and Treatment        Robert
                                               L.Vandersdell
Orthodontics   Dentofacial Deformities:        Bruce N. Epker         1999   Mosby
               Integrated Orthodontic and      , John Paul Stella
               Surgical Correction             , Leward C. Fish

Orthodontics   Begg orthodontic theory and     P. R. Begg, Kesling,   1977   W.B. Saunders Company
               technique                       P. C.

Orthodontics   Current orthodontic concepts    Graber T.M, Thomas 1975       W.B. Saunders Company
               and techniques Volume 1.        M.

Orthodontics   Current orthodontic concepts    Graber T.M, Thomas 1975       W.B. Saunders Company
               and techniques Volume 2.        M.

Orthodontics   Technique and treatment with    Jarabak and Fizzell    1963   Mosby
               light wire appliance

Orthodontics   Clinical dysmorphology of       Melnick, Michael.,     1982   J. Wright, PSG Inc.
               oral-facial structures         Shields, Edward D.,
                                              Burzynski, Norbert
                                              J.
Orthodontics   Orthodontics in daily practice J. A. Salzmann        1974   J. B. Lippincott Company
Orthodontics   Transactions of the Third J.T. Cook                  1975   Crosby,         Lockwood,
               International    Orthodontic                                Staples and Frogmore
               Congress
Orthodontics   Orthodontics, principles and T.M. Graber             1972   W. B. Saunders Company
               practices
Orthodontics   Proportions of the Aesthetic Powell & Hamphrys       1984   Thieme Medical Pub
               Face
Orthodontics   Oral           Myofunctional Marvin L Hanson,        1974   Mosby
               Disorders                      Richard H. Barrett

Orthodontics   Technique and treatment         Boy D.W. Tarpley     1961   Mosby
               with labio-lingual appliance
Orthodontics   Technique and treatment         Earl E.shepard       1961   Mosby
               with twin wire appliance
Orthodontics   Bench-Top Orthodontics          Harvey W. Lawson     1990   Quintessence Pub Co.
Orthodontics   Orthodontic        Removable    Sandhya Shyam        2008   Jaypee
               Appliances                      Lohakare Talmale
Orthodontics   Orthodontic management of       John C. Bennett      2006   Mosby Elsevier
               uncovered Class II Division 1
               malocclusion in children
Textbooks produced by faculty staff
        Histology and Emberyology                               ‫علم النسج والجنين‬
            Periodontal diseases                        ‫أمراض النسج حول السنية‬
               Endodontology                                   ‫مداواة األسنان اللبية‬
             General pathology             ‫علم التشريح المرضي العام علم اإلمراض‬
          Practical Endodontology                ‫مداواة األسنان اللبية القسم العملي‬
 The management of medical problems in      ‫تدبير المشاكل الطبية في عيادة اآلسنان‬
               dental practice
           Surgical oral diseases                             ‫أمراض الفم الجراحية‬
    Local anesthesia in the oral surgery       ‫التخدير الموضعي في جراحة الفكين‬
        Restorative dental materials                     ‫علم المواد السنية الترميمية‬
            Restorative Dentistry                          ‫مداواة األسنان الترميمية‬
  Odontography and dental morphology                        ‫فن رسم األسنان ونحتها‬
     Ethics of professional practice and   ‫آداب مزاولة المهنة وطب األسنان الشرعي‬
             Forensic dentistry
 Manual of biochemistry and Pathological     ‫الكيمياء الحيوية والمرضية القسم العملي‬
                  chemistry
 Biochemistry and pathological chemistry                 ‫الكيمياء الحيوية والمرضية‬
         Practical guide in histology            ‫المرشد العملي في مقرر النسج العام‬
      Introduction Clinical psychology                ‫الوجيز في علم النفس السريري‬
                 Microbiology                                     ‫علم األحياء الدقيقة‬
      Principles of human physiology                     ‫مبادئ الفيزيولوجيا البشرية‬
                Public health                                           ‫الصحة العامة‬
        infection control in dentistry                          ‫السيطرة على اإلنتان‬
                Pharmacology                                              ‫علم األدوية‬
            Restorative Dentistry                            ‫مداواة األسنان الترميمية‬
    Pediatric Dentistry for children and                ‫طب أسنان األطفال واليافعين‬
                 adolescents
                Oral Medicine                                             ‫أمراض الفم‬
              Teeth extraction                                              ‫قلع األسنان‬
     Partial removable prothodontics                    ‫التعويضات الجزئية المتحركة‬
         Principles of Biostatistics                          ‫مبادئ اإلحصاء الحيوي‬
               Oral diseases                                               ‫أمراض الفم‬
       General Physics for dentistry                      ‫الفيزياء العامة لطب األسنان‬
            Preventive Dentistry                                       ‫طب الفم الوقائي‬
               Minor surgery                                        ‫الجراحة الصغرى‬
                 Biophysics                                            ‫الفيزياء الحيوية‬
          Social national culture                            ‫الثقافة القومية االشتراكية‬
     Partial removable prothodontics             ‫التعويضات السنية المتحركة الجزئية‬
    Arabic language for non specialists                                   ‫اللغة العربية‬
              Practical biology                             ‫علم الحياة الحيوانية عملي‬
              Biology Cytology                     ‫علم الحياة الحيوانية الخلية والتكاثر‬
                 Radiology                                                  ‫علم األشعة‬
         Restorative Dentistry                                     ‫مداواة األسنان الترميمية‬
 Complete removable prothodontics                             ‫التعويضات المتحركة الكاملة‬
Removable complete prothodontics and      ‫التعويضات المتحركة الكاملة والتعويضات الفكية‬
     maxillofacial prothodontics                                                   ‫الوجهية‬
  Practical Guide in Oral and Dental              ‫المرشد العملي في علم نسج الفم واألسنان‬
               Histology
    Prothodontic Dental materials                                ‫المواد السنية التعويضية‬
        Summary of Histology                                            ‫موجز علم النسج‬
          Summary of ENT                       ‫الوجيز في أمراض األذن واألنف والحنجرة‬
     Anatomy of head and neck                                       ‫تشريح الرأس والعنق‬
          Langue francaise                                                 ‫اللغة الفرنسية‬
  Selected scientific dental subjects                 ‫انتقاء مواضيع طب األسنان العلمية‬
          Surgical diseases                                           ‫األمراض الجراحية‬
     Summary of eye diseases                                    ‫الوجيز في أمراض العين‬
New English file intermediate student's                                   ‫اللغة االنكليزية‬
                  book
New English file intermediate workbook                                      ‫اللغة االنكليزية‬
                Equipments available in the faculty by Department and its status

                                  num                    Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                                     DISC
                                            Brand                                             NTAI
Equipments          Department
                                  ber                      origin
                                                                      manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                     ARD                     Location
                                                                      cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                               CE

                    BIOLOGY       50        Nikon          Japan      1995                                                    Lab
                    HOSPITAL      1       Olympus        Germany        -
 Photonic                                                                       163
                                  50       Nikon          Japan         -                            35     Bad condition
Microscope          HISTOLOG                                                                                  Moderate
                                   2       Riechert          -          -               2                     condition       Lab
                        Y
                                  60      Olympus            -          -                            60
  Phase                                                                                                                       Lab
 contrast            BIOLOGY       1        Nikon          Japan      1995       1
Microscope
  OMS                                                                                                                        Clinic
Endodontic          endodentic     1        Salar         Brasilia      -        1
Microscope
 Research           HISTOLOG                                                                                                  Lab
                        Y
                                   3          -              -          -        3                    1     Bad condition
microscope
 Stereoscopic                            Meiji Techno                                                                         Lab
 Microscope
                    BIOLOGY       25
                                             SKT
                                                           Japan      1995      25
                                          Centurion       United
                    BIOLOGY        1                                  2009                                    cooled
                                        Scientific LTD   kingdom
                    BIOLOGY        5        Nahita         Spain        -
 centrifuge         BIOLOGY        4    EBA8 Hettich     Germany      1996                                    Small
                                                                                14                                            Lab
                    HOSPITAL       1    EBA8 Hettich     Germany        -                                   pyramidal
                                                                                                            Hematocrit
                    BIOLOGY        2       Hermle        Germany      1994                                  sedimentor
                    HOSPITAL       1       Hettich       Germany        -
                                   1      Lab Tech         Korea      2006              1                                     Lab
                    BIOLOGY
                                   1       Zalimp         Poland        -                             1
                    IMPLANTATIO
   water               N UNIT      1        Melag        Germany        -        6
  distiller         Laser Unit     2       W&H            Austria       -
                    HOSPITAL       1        Stat          Canada        -                                                     Lab
                    BIOLOGY        2      Sartorius      Germany        -                                   Electro- scale
                    HISTOLOG
  Balance               Y
                                   1          -              -          -        4      1
                                                                                                              For height
                    BIOLOGY        1        Varna            -        1992                                     weight
                                                          United
                                   1      Sherwood
                                                         kingdom
                                                                        -               1
                    BIOLOGY
Spectrophotometer                                                                3                                            Lab
                                   1      Secomam         France        -                      1
                    HOSPITAL       1        Scac         Germany        -
 Color meter        BIOLOGY        2        Elico          India        -        2                    2
                    BIOLOGY        1        WTW          Germany        -
  PH-meter          PEDIATRIC      1        Orion          U.S.A        -        3
                    HISTOLOG
                        Y
                                   1          -              -          -               1                                     Lab
                     BIOLOGY       3      Memmert        Germany      2002                     1
                      FIXED
water bath          RESTORATI      1          -            China      1995       5
                        ON
                    HISTOLOG
                        Y
                                   1      Rost frei      Germany        -               1
                                                                                                                              Lab
 Magnetic           BIOLOGY        1        Remi             -          -        1
                                num                      Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                                     DISC
                                          Brand                                               NTAI
Equipments       Department
                                ber                        origin
                                                                      manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                     ARD                        Location
                                                                      cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                               CE
  stirrer
                 BIOLOGY         1        Dairei          Denmark     2009
 Freezer                                                                         2
                 HISTOLOG        1           -               -          -                      1            Bad condition
Refregerator         Y           1                                               1      1
                 BIOLOGY        35        Alp K2           Japan        -                     15
                 SURGERY         1        ALPK2            Japan        -                                                    O.P.Clinic
 Sphygmo
                   ORAL               Sphygmomanometer
manometer
                 MEDECINE
                                 4           12            Japan        -
                                                                                42
                 PEDIATRIC       1       ALP K2            Japan        -                                                       Clinic
 Wrist-Watch
 digital blood
   pressure
                 PEDIATRIC       1       ALP K2            Japan        -
   monitor
                 BIOLOGY        35        Alp K2           Japan        -                     10                                  Lab
Stethoscope                                                                     36
                 SURGERY         1           -               -          -                                                     O.P.Clinic
Kymograph        BIOLOGY        20       Harvard          England       -       20            10
Hemocetometer    BIOLOGY        14        Brand          W. Germany     -       14
Vacuum           BIOLOGY         1        VILLA            Spain        -        1             1
 pump
 Isolated                                                                                                                         Lab
 organs          BIOLOGY         4           -             ‫ل‬
                                                          ‫صنع محّي‬    2009       4
water bath
Bite gauge       BIOLOGY         1      TEKSCAN             USA       2010       1
                                        Kavo Arcus
                 BIOLOGY         1
                                         digmasd
                                                          Germany       -
                                                                                                             With facial
                  Orthodontic    1    RCTORCVO9           Germany     2007                                       arch
                  Orthodontic   10      Dentaurum         Germany       -                                   For designing       Clinic
Articulator       Orthodontic   4       Dentaurum         Germany       -                                     typodent
                                                                                41
                 RESTORATIO
                 NM             21        ‫دنتاتوس‬         Sweden      1956                    21
                 RESTORATIO
                 NM              3         Hano            U.S.A      1925                            3
                       F
                  RESTORATIO     1         Kavo           Germany     1990                                  Semi automatic
                      N
  FACIAL         ENDODEN                                                                                                        Clinic
  ARCHES           TIC
                                 4           -               -          -        4                           Hygienic
                                 1       Binder              -          -                      1
                 BIOLOGY                                                                                                         Lab
                                 1       Titanox           Italy      2009
                                 1       Binder          Germany        -
                   Surgery       3           -               -          -
                                 2       Binder              -          -                                                      HOSPITAL
                                 4       Binder          Germany      2010                                      Dry
                  Orthodontic
                                 1       Malaga          Germany        -
 sterilizer      ENDODEN                                                        28
                    TIC
                                 1        Binder         Germany        -
                   Period
                  ontology
                                 1       Heraeus             -          -
                 Laser Unit      1        JRAD             ‫وطني‬         -
                                 1     Tau Quartaz          Italy     2002
                  Orthodontic
                                 1        Glows            Taiwan       -                                    Quartiz
                 HOSPITAL        1           -               -          -                                       Gas
                               num                    Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                                  DISC
                                         Brand                                             NTAI
Equipments    Department
                               ber                      origin
                                                                   manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                  ARD                      Location
                                                                   cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                            CE
              PEDIATRIC         1        Binder           -          -                                   Electrical
                                1     Statim 5000      Canada        -
              HOSPITAL
                                2      Steri-Vac        USA          -
                    F
              RESTORATIO        1     WTC bandel       Germany     1999
                  N
              HISTOLOG
                  Y
                                1           -             -          -               1
              IMPLANTATIO                                            -
                 N UNIT         2        Melag         Germany
Glass bead                                                                                                              O.P.Clinic
 sterilizer
              SURGERY           1        Serial           -          -
                                1        Melag        W.Germany      -                      1
               BIOLOGY
                                1        Melag         Germany     2009
                                2        Melag         Germany       -
               Orthodontic
                                1        Exacta         Italy      2002
                                                                   1999-                                                O.P.Clinic
              SURGERY           1        Exacta         Italy
                                                                   1998
Autoclav      ENDODEN
                                1        Exacta         Italy         -
                TIC                                                          15
   e             ORAL
               MEDECINE         2          -            Japan      2005
                 Period
                                1        Exacta         Italy      2007
                ontology
                                2      Hirayama         Japan        -
              HOSPITAL
                                1           -          England       -
              Laser Unit        2     EURO NDA          Italy        -
  Digital        ORAL                 Item No: co -                  -
                                1                       China
ultrasonic     MEDECINE                   4820                                3
              BRIDGES&COROWN
 cleaner             ES         2          -            China      2009
              HOSPITAL          1          -              -          -
Cryotherapy      ORAL                                                         2
               MEDECINE         1     Cryopre maxi     Denmark       -                                   With 6 heads
Heal ozone       ORAL
               MEDECINE         1        Kavo          Germany     2008       1
 2130C
                               11    A3plus Anthos      Italy      2007
               Orthodontic      9    A3plus Anthos      Italy      2009
                               10    A3plus Anthos      Italy        -
                                2        Anthos         Italy        -
                                                                                                                          HOSPITAL
                                1      Castellini         -          -
                                4        Anthos         Italy      2006
               SURGERY                                                                                                   O.P.Clinic
Dental                          3        Kavo           Brazil     2003              2      1
                               12        Anthos         Italy      2006
 Unit                                                                        364
                                                                                                                         Ext.Clinic
                               10      Castellini         -        Too old

                 ORAL          46        Anthos         Italy        -               45            1
               MEDECINE
                                2        Kavo          Germany       -               2
              PEDIATRI         43        Anthos         Italy        -               43
                 C              6        Kavo          Brasilia      -                             6
              ENDODENTI
                  C
                               48        Anthos         Italy        -
                    M          11        Anthos         Italy        -
                                   num                     Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                                       DISC
                                             Brand                                              NTAI
Equipments          Department
                                   ber                       origin
                                                                        manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                       ARD                      Location
                                                                        cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                                 CE
                    RESTORATIO
                        N
                                    6        Anthos          Italy      1996              6
                                   27       Castellini       Italy      1980                           27
                                    4         Kavo           Brazil     2003              4
                         F         36        Anthos          Italy      1996
                    RESTORATIO
                        N          12         Kavo         Germany      2005
                      Period       37       Anthos             -          -
                     ontology      12     ECO Anthos           -          -
                                    1         Kavo           Brazil       -               1
                    BIOLOGY
                                    2       Sonocast           -          -                             2
                    IMPLANTATIO
                       N UNIT       6         Kavo           Brazil       -
                    Laser Unit      3         Kavo           Brazil       -
   CMS
   Dental
                    Laser Unit      1      Soft Cazer      Denmark        -        1
Stereotaxic                         1       Harvard         England       -        1
Spirometer                          3       Medikro         Finland     2009       3
  EMG +             BIOLOGY         1      Micromed          Italy      2009       1
   EPS
   ECG                              1       Innomed        Hungary      2009       1
                                    1       Gendex          England     2009                                  automatic
                    ENDODEN         1        Ugarit          Syria        -
                      TIC           2           -            Syria        -                                   manual
                    BIOLOGY         4       Degotzen         Italy      2007              1             3
                       ORAL
                     MEDECINE       2        Sopro          France      2005                                    Digital
                                         Evolution x300-
    X-ray           PEDIATRIC       1
                                               2C
                                                             Italy        -       16
                                    1           -              -          -                                    Panoramic

                    HOSPITAL        1           -              -          -                                     Portable
                                    1           -              -          -
                    ENDODEN         1         Fiad           Italy        -
                      TIC           2         Orks           Italy        -
                                    1     Typearcodent      Sweden      1992
                     Orthodontic   10     Dentauarum       Germany      1999

Necatoscope                         3        Ugarit          Syria        -
                    IMPLANTATIO             Magna-x                               27
                       N UNIT       6
                                           Implanteo
                                                            Austria       -
                    SURGERY         8           -              -          -                                                   O.P.Clinic
  x-ray film
    holder
                                    1           -              -          -        1
Lead apron                          1           -              -          -        1
  Curing            ENDODEN
                      TIC           1      Model 100         USA          -        1
radiometer
     Force
measurement unit                    1           -              -          -        1                          Force meter

Ion selector unit                   1        Orion             -          -        1                          Ion selection
                    BIOLOGY         2       Medical          Italy        -
    Scaler               F                                                         9
                                    1         NSK          Germany      2008                                  Ultrasonic
                    RESTORATIO
                                   num                    Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                                      DISC
                                             Brand                                             NTAI
Equipments          Department
                                   ber                      origin
                                                                       manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                      ARD                           Location
                                                                       cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                                CE
                         N
                      Period        5        NSK            Japan        -
                     ontology       1        EMS            Japan      2004
Electro-surgical
    scalpel         BIOLOGY         1       Satelec        France      2009
                                                                                                               Ultrasonic
Ultra sonic
surgical unit
                    HOSPITAL        1      Piezotom        France        -                                      surgical
                                                                                                               apparatus
                                                                                                                                    O.P.Clinic

   Electrical
                    SURGERY         1          -              -           -       6                          Electrical scalpel

  scalpel and                                                                                                  Electrical l
  coagulator        IMPLANTATIO
                       N UNIT       2       Satelec        France      2009                                    scalpel and
                                                                                                               coagulator
                                                                                                               Electrical l
                    PEDIATRIC       1       AC MA           U.S.A        -                                     coagulator
                                           American
                                    1
                                            Dental
                                                            U.S.A        -
   Laser             Laser Unit
                                    1       Biolase         U.S.A        -        3
 apparatus
                    HOSPITAL        1     Prometheus          -          -
  Anesthesia                        2       Taema          France        -
                    HOSPITAL
  apparatus
                                    1       Drager        Germany        -
   Dental                                                                         4
                                             3M                        1996                                      U.S.A
 electronic         PEDIATRIC       1                       China                                             accessories
                                          Model 8670
 anesthesia
  Operation         IMPLANTATIO
     light             N UNIT       3      Surgeries       France      2009       3
  Monitor                           2       Generra         U.S.A        -        2
Resuscitation       HOSPITAL
unit with air                       3       Taema          France        -        3
compressors
  Manual
resuscitator        PEDIATRIC       1       Besmed            -          -        1
   child
  Automatic
serum injector
                    HOSPITAL        2       PFA-05          Japan        -        2
                    IMPLANTATIO     2    Can-medical       Turkey        -
                       N UNIT
 Surgical suction                   2      Entiance         China        -
                      Period                                                      9
                     ontology
                                    1          -              -          -                             1
                                    4          -              -          -                                                        O.P.Clinic
                    SURGERY
 Saliva ejector                     3          -              -          -        3
Pulse oximeter      PEDIATRIC       1    NONIN spo2         U.S.A        -        1
  Bone file                        12          -              -          -
                    SURGERY                                                      25
                                   13          -              -          -                                                        O.P.Clinic
                    SURGERY         4          -              -          -                                                        Ext.Clinic
Bone cutter         IMPLANTATIO
                       N UNIT       1    Implant center   Germany        -        6
                    ENDODEN                                                                                  piezotome
                      TIC
                                    1          -              -          -
Pulsoximeter                        1      Nonin            U.S.A        -        1
Nitrous oxide       PEDIATRIC             Quantiflex
sedation unit
                                    3
                                           MDM
                                                            U.S.A      2001       3
Blood sugar
analysis unite
                    HOSPITAL        1       Arkray          Japan        -        1
    Air                             1      Castelini        Italy        -                      1
 compressor
                     Orthodontic                                                  2
                                    1        Silair           -          -                      1
                               num                   Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI           comments
                                                                                                 DISC
                                         Brand                                            NTAI
Equipments       Department
                               ber                     origin
                                                                  manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                 ARD                   Location
                                                                  cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                           CE
                 BIOLOGY        1    Discus Dental     U.S.A      2009
                                     CROMALUX
                                2
                                          75
                                                     Germany      1999              1      1
                 Orthodontic
                                1       Satelec       France      2005
                   ORAL
                 MEDECINE       1     Cromalux i5    Germany        -
                 PEDIATRIC      2      Flash light   European       -
                     F
                 RESTORATIO     2      Flash light     U.S.A      2008
                     N
  Light                         1           -            -          -
  cure                                                                      31
                 PEDIATRIC      1        ‫فيفياوندا‬    austria       -
apparatus
                                3      ‫تروما لوكس‬    Germany        -
                 ENDODEN
                   TIC
                                8         Lyte           -          -                      1
                      F
                 RESTORATIO     2           -            -          -                                                  Lab-5
                     N
                   Period               ESPE
                  ontology
                                1
                                       ELIPARII
                                                     Germany        -
                   ORAL
                 MEDECINE       6      Flash lite      U.S.A        -                                   Wireless
                 ENDODEN                                                                                Daul cure
   Light cure
                   TIC
                                2           -          U.S.A        -        2                          Light guid
apparatus TIPS
                                1    Medidento GBR   Germany      2009
                 BIOLOGY
                                1       Satelec       France      2009
                 SURGERY        1      Dentistry         -          -                                                O.P.Clinic
                                1        Softly      Germany        -
                 PEDIATRIC
                                2        ‫فيفرونت‬      Holland       -
                 ENDODEN        4       Utranol      Germany        -                                    vibrating
                   TIC          2           -          Italy        -
                                                                            20
Amalgamator          F
                 RESTORATIO     2           -            -          -                                                  Lab-5
                     N
                 PEDIATRIC      1           -            -          -
                 ENDODEN        1           -            -          -
                   TIC          2        Gotzn         Italy        -                                     Powder
                     F
                 RESTORATIO     1        Softly       France      2008
                     N
                 ENDODEN
                    TIC
                                2           -            -          -                                   capsule
                 BIOLOGY        1       Paakell        U.S.A      2008
                 Orthodontic    1       Digtitest      U.S.A      2007
                   ORAL
                 MEDECINE      12       Anthos         Italy        -
    Pulp
  vitality           F                                                      86
                 RESTORATIO    48       Anthos         Italy      1996
   tester            N
                 SURGERY        4        Kavo         Brasilia      -                                                O.P.Clinic
                 ENDODEN
                    TIC
                               20      Anthoger       France        -                                   Electrical
 ‫جهاز قياس‬       PEDIATRIC      1           -            -          -        1
                                  num                  Country of    Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                                    DISC
                                           Brand                                             NTAI
Equipments          Department
                                  ber                    origin
                                                                     manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                                    ARD                    Location
                                                                     cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                              CE

     ‫شدة‬
Intensity
of light
cure
                                   1     Kavo 2120      Germany        -
 Diagnodent                                                                     2
                       ORAL
                     MEDECINE
                                   1     Kavo 2095      Germany        -
                                          Analytic-
                                   1
                                         Technology
                                                         U.S.A         -
                                   1    Dentaport ZX     Japan         -
                    PEDIATRIC            Apex finder
                                   1
                                           A.F.A
                                                         U.S.A         -
   Apex
                        F                                                       6
  locator           RESTORATIO     1       NSK           Japan       2009
                        N
                                         Analytic
                    ENDODEN        1
                                        Technology          -          -
                      TIC
                                   1      Root zx           -          -
                                        Rondo flex
Air abration        PEDIATRIC      1
                                           2013
                                                        Germany        -        1
                    ENDODEN
                                   2       NSK           Japan         -
   Rotary             TIC                X-Smart /
                                   1
                                          Denply
                                                       Switzerland     -
 preparation                                                                    5
   system               F          1       NSK           Japan       2009
                    RESTORATIO                                                                              Wireless
                        N          1       NSK           Japan       2009
                                                                                                           Plus 2 sand
Sand blasting                      1     Mic Swill         -           -        1                            boxes
                    ENDODEN                                                                                 mg1000))
 ‫جهاز نسخ الحفر‬       TIC         1          -              -          -        1
 canal micro
  seal unite
                                   1         -              -          -        1
Sand blasting                     1      Rondo flex     Germany        -        1
Autoclave baggage
     sealing
                    IMPLANTATIO
                       N UNIT      1         -            ‫وطني‬         -        1
  ‫جهاز تصنيع‬        ENDODEN
    ‫العينات‬           TIC
                                   1         -              -          -        1
ALGINATOR               F          1         -           Japan       1990       1
                    RESTORATIO
 ‫جهاز مزج مطاط‬          N          1         -           Japan       1990       1
    Tissue
  processing
                                   1         -              -          -        1      1
  Automated
  microtome                        1         -              -          -        1      1
Manual paraffin     HISTOLOG
  processor             Y          1         -              -          -        1                    1     Bad condition
 Paraffin auto
   machine
                                   1         -              -          -        1                    1     Bad condition
Manual paraffin
  processor
                                   1         -              -          -        1                    1     Bad condition

   Thickness            F
    guage           RESTORATIO     1         -          Germany      1995                                  Dentaurium
                        N
‫جهاز فاحص ثبات‬
     ‫الزرعة‬
                    HOSPITAL       1       Ossteu       Sweden         -
  Dental root
     canal
 measurement        PEDIATRIC      1     Denta port      Japan         -
 and treatment
      unit
                              num                Country of    Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                              DISC
                                      Brand                                            NTAI
Equipments     Department
                              ber                  origin
                                                               manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                              ARD                        Location
                                                               cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                        CE
               BIOLOGY         5      Kavo        Germany        -                                                        Lab
                Orthodontic    7      Kavo        Germany        -               4      3
               ENDODEN
                              89      Kavo            -           -                    19
                 TIC
                    M
               RESTORATIO     10      Kavo        Germany         -              10                                      Clinic
                   N
Micro motor
of hand-            F         63      Kavo        Germany      1995              48    15                                Lab-5
               RESTORATIO
piece              N          114     Kavo        Germany      1995              74    40                               Lab-4+6
                Laser Unit     1      Kavo            -          -
               SURGERY        28      Kavo        Germany        -                                     Surgical        O.P.Clinic
               PEDIATRIC       2      EWL         Germany        -                                    Industrial

               ENDODEN        15        -             -          -                                      Arian
                 TIC          157       -             -          -                                   Micro connector

               SURGERY         4        -             -           -                     4                              O.P.Clinic
                    M         60       WH         Germany         -                    30             Industrial          Lab
                RESTORATIO
  motor              N         2      Varo          Italy      2007                     2                                Clinic
               IMPLANTATIO
                  N UNIT       2     Antoger       France        -                                     Anthogyr
  MICRO
  MOTOR        SURGERY         4        -             -          -                                                     O.P.Clinic
CONNECTOR
                              50        -             -          -
               SURGERY                                                                                                 O.P.Clinic
                              10        -             -          -                                    Industrial
               ENDODEN                                                                               micromotor
                  TIC
                              285    pioneer      Germany        -                                    Straight
               SURGERY        31        -             -          -                                                     O.P.Clinic
                                                                                                     Micro motor
               ENDODEN                                                                               (not straight)
                 TIC
                              263       -             -          -
                    F
               RESTORATIO     48     pioneer     Switzerland   1996
                   N
  hand          SURGERY        4        -             -          -                                   Micro motor
                                                                                                                       O.P.Clinic
  piece        ENDODEN
                  TIC
                              10        -             -          -
               SURGERY        22        -             -          -                                                     O.P.Clinic
               ENDODEN
                  TIC
                              15        -             -          -
                                                                                                     Turbine
                    F
               RESTORATIO     48     pioneer     Switzerland   1996
                   N
                               2    Micro mega        -          -                                    micromiga
               ENDODEN
                 TIC           2      Anthos          -          -
                                                                                                     microtini
                               1      Milano        Italy      2007
Trimmer                        3      Bego        Germany         -       2      1
 Pressure
                               3      Leleux        Italy         -
  cooker
               Orthodontic
Baggage                              Malage
                               1                  Germany      2007
 sealing                             OHG
 ‫جهاز رقاقات‬
                               1     Ministar     Germany      1997
   ‫األكريل‬
                               num              Country of    Year of           OPE   MAI           comments
                                                                                             DISC
                                      Brand                                           NTAI
Equipments       Department
                               ber                 origin
                                                              manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                             ARD                    Location
                                                              cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                       CE
  acrelic
  Vacum
POLISHING
 ACRELIC                        1    Deroten     England         -
APPARATUS
  Spot
                                3     RMO          USA        2003
 welding
                     F         68       -            -        1995              53    15                           Lab-5
                 RESTORATIO
                     N         116      -            -        1995              96    20            Laboratory    Lab-4+6
 Fantom                        80       -            -          -       431
                                                                                                    Mask +arm
                                                                                                    Mask +arm
                               80       -        Germany        -                                   +Frazaco
                 ENDODEN                                                                            Articulator
                   TIC         87       -            -          -
Dental plastic
   model                        -       -            -          -
                               159      -            -          -
                     F
                                                                        34
Dental plastic                 68     Kavo       Germany        -                                                  Lab-5
                 RESTORATIO                                              1
   model
                     N         114    Kavo       Germany        -                                                 Lab-4+6
  ‫جهاز تشريد‬
                                                                                                     Normal
Depot phorese                   6       -            -          -        6                            head
   Gerat
                                                                                                      For ion
  ELECTRICAL
TRANSFORMATOR                   1       -            -          -        1                            device
  FLORID
 ELECTROD                       4     Orion       U.S.A         -        4
 Clamps                                              -
  box            ENDODEN        5       -                       -        5
                   TIC
  PIED DE
  COULIS
                                1       -            -          -        1
 ORAL
RETRACT                         2       -        Germany        -        2
  OR
  COLOR                                              -
  GUIDE                         2     Vita                      -        2
  SHADE
 CERAMIC
   OVEN              F          1       -            -        1998       1
VACCUMMA         RESTORATIO
  CHINE
                     N          1    caution       USA        1995       1
  Plasma
screen LCD
                 Orthodontic    1      LG       South Korea   2008       1
Dishwasher       HOSPITAL       2     ‫بنكوان‬         -          -        2
                                3     Sinon          -          -               2      1             Overhead
                                1    Kodak           -          -               1                    projector
                 BIOLOGY                                                                              Slide
                                1    Reflecta    Portugal       -               1                   projector
                                3    Sanyo        China         -               3                   data show
                 Orthodontic    1       -            -          -
 projector       ENDODEN                                                15
                   TIC
                                1       -            -          -
                     F                                                                                Slide
                 RESTORATIO     1       -            -          -                                   projector       Lab-5
                     N
                 HISTOLOG                                                       2
                     Y
                                3       -            -          -                             1
                 SURGERY        1    Sanxo         Japan        -                                   data show     O.P.Clinic
                            num                   Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI            comments
                                                                                              DISC
                                      Brand                                            NTAI
Equipments    Department
                            ber                     origin
                                                               manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                              ARD                        Location
                                                               cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                        CE
                             1       Dentax         China        -                                                     O.P.Clinic
                ORAL         1    Canon MP (32)     China        -
              MEDECINE       1    Canon EOS 500     Japan      2009
              ENDODEN                                                                                  Digital
                TIC
                             1          -             -          -
 Camera           F                                                       9
              RESTORATIO     1          -             -          -
                  N
                             1      Nikon D80       Japan      2007              1
              Orthodontic
                             1     Canon A95        Japan      2005                     1
              ENDODEN
                 TIC
                             2      Ara Scope         -          -                                   Intraoral
              BIOLOGY        6          -             -          -
                             1      Samsung           -          -                                                     O.P.Clinic
              SURGERY        1      L.G.Asus          -          -
                             1        340L            -          -
              IMPLANTATIO
                 N UNIT      1      Samsung           -          -
                             1      Samsung       Malaysia       -                                   Bad condition-2
              HISTOLOG
computer          Y
                             1       Compaq       Malaysia       -       22                           Discarding- 1
                             1        Acer         Taiwan        -
              ENDODENTI
                  C          1     P4 Compaq          -          -
                  F
              RESTORATIO
                  N
                             1     P4 Compaq          -          -
                Period
               ontology
                             7          -             -          -
              BIOLOGY        1       Lanier        France        -                      1
              SURGERY        1        Alifti          -          -                      1
Photocopier   PEDIATRIC      1          -             -          -        4
              HISTOLOG       1
                  Y                     -             -          -               1
                             1       Brother        China        -                      1
                             1      Lexmark         USA          -                      1                                Laser
              BIOLOGY        1                    Vietnam                        1
                                                                                 4
                             4                    Thailand                                                               Color
                                       HP                        -               1
 Printer      SURGERY        1                        -          -       12
              HOSPITAL       1                      China        -
                Period
               ontology
                             1          -             -          -
              ENDODENTI
                  C          1          -             -          -
                  F
              RESTORATIO     1          -             -          -
                  N
              ENDODENTI
                  C          1          -             -                   3
Scanner
                  F          1          -             -
              RESTORATIO
                               num           Country of   Year of           OPE   MAI           comments
                                                                                         DISC
                                     Brand                                        NTAI
Equipments        Department
                               ber             origin
                                                          manufa    total   RAT   NAN
                                                                                         ARD                 Location
                                                          cturing           ION          ING
                                                                                   CE
                      N
                    Period
                   ontology
                                1      -         -
                  HISTOLOG      1      -         -          -               1                   With video
     TV                                                              2
                      Y         1      -         -          -               1                     Color
                  HISTOLOG      1      -         -          -               1
  Video                                                              2
                      Y         1              Korea        -                                     Dayoo
                  HISTOLOG
Internal Radio-
    station           Y
                                1      -         -          -        1      1
       Assessing current curriculum delivered in the light of national academic reference standards written for dentistry
       (2011).

       Knowledge and understanding

Knowledge and understanding                            A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 a13 a14 A15 a16 a17
Basic science for understanding growth,                x
development in health
Human body in health and disease                          x
Human disease and craniofacial disorders related              x
to dentistry
Infection control procedures                                      x
Psychology, social sciences, pain control                             x
Oral medicine and maxillofacial disease                                   x
Principles of pathology, pharmacology, radiology                              x
Microbiology in health and disease                                                x
Oral diseases and their effects.                                                      x
Dental sciences                                                                           x
Ethics related to dentistry and scientific research.                                          x
Dental technology                                                                                 --
Emergency in dentistry                                                                                 x
Evidence- based Dentistry and scientific research                                                           ---
Primary health care in Syria and population needs                                                                 ---
Special care dentistry                                                                                                  ---
Principles of continuous ---professional                                                                                      --
development
Principles of referral and recall                                                                                             --
Intellectual skills




  Intellectual skills                               B1   B2   B3   B4   B5   B6   B7   B8   B9
  Application of critical thinking                  -
  Integrate basic science in clinical dentistry          -
  Recognize between normal and abnormal                       x
  Plan treatment and define priorities                             -
  Define special tests and investigations                               +-
  Solve problem and find evidence                                            -
  Appraise information in articles and scientific                                 -
  data
  Take ethical, scientific decision                                                    x
  Provide care to all patients and respect                                                  x
  autonomy
         Professional and clinical skills

Professional and clinical skills                             C   C2   C3   C4   C5   C6   C7   C8   C9   C10   C11   C12   C13   C14   C15   C16
                                                             1
Take medical and dental history, ask for special tests       x

Assess medical health and refer                                  -
Define pathology and risk factors for dental disease                  x

Plan treatment and provide comprehensive treatment                    -

Provide clinical procedures( preventive, local anesthesia,                 X
extraction, diagnosis, take x ray, periodontal treatment,
restorative, endodontic treatment, undertake fixed and
removable prosthodontics, preventive orthodontics
Apply infection control procedures                                              x
Clinical audit and quality assurance in dentistry                                    -

Assess anxiety and control pain                                                           x
Provide preventive procedures and treatment                                                    x
Adhere to health and safety procedures                                                              x
Mange urgent cases in dentistry                                                                          x
Manage medical emergency in dental clinic, basic life                                                          -
support
Assess treatment and do corrective procedures                                                                        -
Presecibe medications                                                                                                      x
Apply knowledge in clinical dentistry                                                                                            x
Apply ethical and legal rules and regulation(informed                                                                                  -
consent, ethical approval in dental clinic)
Write and save patient record and handle information                                                                                         -
General and transferable skills



General and transferable skills    D1   D2   D3   D4   D5   D6   D7   D8

Take initiatives and               -
responsibility
Involve in international                -
conferences and student
exchange
Search in resources and                      -
scientific databases
Work in teams                                     -

Communicate effectively in                             -
mother and foreign language in
professional and scientific life
Use health informatics for                                  -
patient record and analyze data
Manage time                                                      -

Self assessment and define                                            -
strength and weakness
Things that are not covered in the current curriculum with reference to national academic reference standards.
    Dental technology.

      Evidence-based Dentistry and scientific research.

      Primary health care in Syria and population needs.

      Special care dentistry.

      Principles of continuous ---professional development.

      Principles of referral and recall.

  Intellectual skills
    Application of critical thinking.

      Integration of basic science in clinical dentistry.

      Plan treatment and define priorities.

      Solve problem and find evidence.

      Appraise information in articles and scientific data.


Professional and clinical skills

      Assess medical health and refer.

      Plan treatment and provide comprehensive treatment
      Clinical audit and quality assurance in dentistry.

      Manage medical emergency in dental clinic, basic life support.

      Assess treatment and do corrective procedures


General and transferable skills
    Take initiatives and responsibility.

      Involve in international conferences and student exchange.

      Search in resources and scientific databases.

      Work in teams.

      Communicate effectively in mother and foreign language in professional and scientific life.

      Use health informatics for patient record and analyze data.

      Manage time.

      Self assessment and define strength and weakness.

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:218
posted:5/16/2012
language:English
pages:216
fanzhongqing fanzhongqing http://
About